Mtmtel3vfdsp3001gb PDF

 

FREQUENCY INVERTER  

3VFMAC-DSP 6P ASYNC (Asynchronous)

3VFMAC-DSP 6P SYNC (Synchronous)

Installation • Assembly • Commissioning Use • Maintenance • Repair Technical Manual  Manual  V0.01 – 04/2013 English / MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN Item: 0000003005 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter ÍNDICE 1. GENERAL .............................................................. ............................................................................................ ............................................................. ................................................ ................. 6  1.1. Scope of the manual .................................... .................................................................. ............................................................. .................................................... ..................... 6   1.2. Use guidelin guideline e of this manual...... manual..................................... ............................................................. ............................................................. ......................................... .......... 6  1.3. Recipient Recipients s ............................................................ .......................................................................................... ............................................................. ........................................... ............ 6   1.4. Documen Documentt structure ............................................... ............................................................................. ............................................................. .......................................... ........... 6   1.5. Liability exclusion exclusions s ..................................................................................... ................................................................................................................... .................................... ...... 6   1.6. Copyrig Copyright ht........................................ ....................................................................... .............................................................. ............................................................. ................................ .. 6   1.7. Symbols .............................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................. .......................................... ............ 6  

2. SAFETY INFORMATION ................................................ ............................................................................... .............................................................. ........................................ ......... 7  2.1. General ........................... .......................................................... ............................................................. ............................................................. ................................................ ................. 7   2.2. Inverte Inverterr use .......................................... ........................................................................ ............................................................. .......................................................... ........................... 7  2.3. Produc Productt safety ....................................... ..................................................................... ............................................................. .......................................................... ........................... 7  2.4. Requirem Requirements ents for staff ............................................ ........................................................................... ............................................................. ......................................... ........... 7   2.5. Commissio Commissioning ning ............................ ........................................................... ............................................................. ............................................................. ..................................... ...... 7   2.6. Workin Working g on the inverter. Dangers due to residual voltage .................................................. ................................................................... ................. 7  2.7. Modifica Modifications/actio tions/actions ns on the inverter ............... .............................................. ............................................................. .................................................. .................... 7  2.8. Duties for the installer/ installer/maintenan maintenance ce staff............................................................. .......................................................................................... ............................. 8

 

3. GENERAL OVERVIEW OF THE 3VFMAC-DSP 6P ........................................................... .................................................................................... .........................9  3.1. Applicati Application on field ................................ .............................................................. ............................................................. .............................................................. ................................. 9   3.2. Functional descrip description tion ........................................ ...................................................................... ............................................................. ............................................... ................ 9   3.2.1. General features ............................................ ........................................................................... .............................................................. ......................................... .......... 9   3.2.2. Control system .............................................................. ............................................................................................ ...................................................... ........................ 10   3.2.3. Operating Operating modes.... modes.................................. ............................................................. .............................................................. ................................................. .................. 10  3.2.4. Parameterisation Parameterisation and monitorin monitoring g............................................................ ........................................................................................... ................................. 10  3.3. Outstandin Outstanding g parts of the equipment .......................... ......................................................... .............................................................. ...................................... ....... 11  3.3.1. LEDs.................................................. ................................................................................ ............................................................. ................................................... .................... 11  3.3.1.1. LED Bank 1: Inputs for control board commands and contactor reading .............................. 11   3.3.1.2. LED Bank 2: Input for the rescue signal and voltage-free voltage-free outputs ........ ............... ............... ............... ............... .......... 13  3.3.1.3. LED Bank 3: 3 : Indicators Indicators .............................. ............................................................. .............................................................. .................................... ..... 13   3.3.1.4. LED Run ..................................................... .................................................................................... .............................................................. .................................. ... 14  3.3.1.5. LED “DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE” ............... .............................................. .............................................................. ........................................ ......... 14  3.3.2. Fuses............................................ .......................................................................... ............................................................. ........................................................ ......................... 15  3.3.2.1. Fuse F1 ............................................................ .......................................................................................... ........................................................... ............................. 15   3.3.2.2. Fuse F2 (1A) .......................................................... ......................................................................................... ...................................................... ....................... 16   3.3.2.3. Fuses F3 (1A), F4 (1A) .............................. ............................................................. .............................................................. ..................................... ...... 16   3.3.3. Relays + Triac .............................................................................. ............................................................................................................ ....................................... ......... 16   3.3.4. Monitoring Monitoring and Progr Programming amming Interface ............................................... ............................................................................. .................................... ...... 18   3.4. Mains power connections connections ............................................................................ .......................................................................................................... .................................. .... 19   3.5. Input command connections connections.......................... ......................................................... .............................................................. ................................................. .................. 22   3.6. Communi Communication cation Interfaces Interfaces ............................. ........................................................... ............................................................. ................................................. .................. 23   3.7. Models... .................................. ............................................................. ............................................................. .............................................................. ......................................... .......... 24 

4. GENERAL DIMENSIONS ................................................................................... .................................................................................................................. ................................. .. 25  5. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS.............................................. DIAGRAMS............................................................................. ............................................................. ..................................... ....... 26  5.1. Asynchron Asynchronous ous................................................................. ................................................................................................ ............................................................. .............................. 26 

6. ADDITIONAL ELEMENTS ........................................................................ ....................................................................................................... ........................................... ............ 28  6.1. Encode Encoderr ........................... ......................................................... ............................................................. .............................................................. .............................................. ............... 28   6.1.1. Industrial encode encoderr (asynchronous (asynchronous motors only) .................................... .................................................................. .................................... ...... 29   6.1.2. Low cost encode encoderr (asynchronous (asynchronous motors only) ...... ..................................... ............................................................. .................................... ...... 31   6.1.3. Absolute/sinusoidal Absolute/sinusoidal encoder (synchronous (synchronous motors only).............................. ............................................................ .............................. 32  6.2. Weighin Weighing g control: control: VK2P (asynchr (asynchronous onous only)............................................................. ................................................................................... ...................... 36  V0.01 – 04/2013

2

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 6.2.1. Description Description............................................................................. ............................................................................................................ ............................................. .............. 36  6.2.2. Requirements Requirements ............................ .......................................................... ............................................................. ............................................................ ............................. 36   6.2.3. Parameterisation Parameterisation................................................................. ................................................................................................ ................................................. .................. 36  6.2.4. Viewing......................................... ........................................................................ ............................................................. ....................................................... ......................... 36 

7. Monitoring............................................. ........................................................................... ............................................................. ............................................................. ..............................37   7.1. General ........................... .......................................................... ............................................................. ............................................................. .............................................. ............... 37  7.2. Console handling ....................................................................... ..................................................................................................... .................................................. .................... 37   7.3. Asynchron Asynchronous ous version monitoring ............................................................ ........................................................................................... ...................................... ....... 40   7.4. Synchron Synchronous ous version monitoring monitoring .......................... ......................................................... ............................................................. ........................................... ............. 41   7.4.1. Block 0: main block .............................. ............................................................. .............................................................. ................................................. .................. 42  7.4.2. Block 1: sinusoidal and absolute encoder ....... ...................................... .............................................................. .......................................... ........... 43  7.4.3. Block 2: current data ............................ ........................................................... .............................................................. ................................................. .................. 43 

8. PARAMETERS........................................................................ ...................................................................................................... ............................................................ ..............................44   8.1. General ........................... .......................................................... ............................................................. ............................................................. .............................................. ............... 44  8.2. Console handling in programming programming mode .................................................... ................................................................................... ..................................... ...... 44   8.3. Paramete Parameters rs of asynchr asynchronous onous version ............................... ............................................................. ............................................................. ................................. .. 47   8.4. Paramete Parameters rs of synchro synchronous nous versio version n ..................................................... ................................................................................... ........................................... ............. 52  

9. Control of the inverter ............................................................ .......................................................................................... .......................................................... ............................60   9.1. Inputs ............................ ........................................................... .............................................................. ............................................................. .............................................. ................ 61  9.1.1. Emergency Emergency stop (contactors’ (contactors’ reading).......................................................... ..................................................................................... ........................... 61  9.1.2. Run ...................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................... .............................................. ............... 61  9.1.3. Rated speed / Approach Approach speed......................................................... ........................................................................................ ...................................... ....... 61 9.1.4. 2nd Speed Bank ................ ............................................... .............................................................. ............................................................. ...................................... ........ 62    9.1.5. Inspection Inspection speed ....................................... ...................................................................... ............................................................. ............................................ .............. 62  9.1.6. 2nd Acceleration Acceleration Bank............................. ............................................................ .............................................................. ................................................ ................. 62  9.1.7. Run direction ............................................ .......................................................................... ............................................................. ............................................. .............. 63   9.1.8 Error reset/reading of brake microswitches/reading of overspeed governor interlocking coil state (EN81+A3 (EN81+ A3 amendment) amendment) ............................. ............................................................ ............................................................. ..................................................... ....................... 63  9.1.8.1. Error Reset Function ..................................................... .................................................................................... ................................................ ................. 64   9.1.8.2. Function reading of brake microswitches .......................................................... ......................................................................... ............... 65  9.1.8.3. Reading of overspeed governor interlocking coil state (EN81 + A3) .................................... 65  9.1.9. Rescue signal (EM) ..... .................................... .............................................................. ............................................................. ............................................ .............. 65   9.2. VoltageVoltage-free free outputs ............................................................. ............................................................................................ ....................................................... ........................ 66   9.2.1. Relay of speed limit/Interlocking of overspeed governor/Monitor of activity (KRL1) ...................... 66   9.2.1.1. Relay of speed limit ...................................................... ..................................................................................... ................................................ ................. 67  9.2.1.2. Overspeed Overspeed govern governor or Interlocking/Rel Interlocking/Release ease ..................................... ................................................................... ................................... ..... 67  9.2.1.3. Inverter state monitoring monitoring ......................................................... ........................................................................................ ..................................... ...... 67   9.2.2. Contactors’ control control triac (KRL2) (*) ............... .............................................. .............................................................. .......................................... ........... 68  9.2.3. Relay of brake control (KRL3) (*) ................................. ................................................................ .......................................................... ........................... 68  9.3. Sequence.... ................................... .............................................................. ............................................................. ............................................................. .................................... ..... 69 

10. MANAGEMENT OF ERRORS ................................ .............................................................. ............................................................. ................................................ ................. 7 72 2  10.1. Error Reset ............................... .............................................................. .............................................................. .............................................................. ................................... .... 72  10.1.1 Autoreset .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................. ....................................... ......... 72  10.1.2 External Reset of an Erro Errorr (Terminal (Terminal 19 connector XC2) ............................................. ........................................................... .............. 72  10.1.3. Exceptions Exceptions........................................ ....................................................................... .............................................................. .................................................. ................... 72  10.2. Actions for respon responding ding to errors errors .................................................. ................................................................................. ................................................. .................. 73  10.3. Description Description of the Error Errors s ............................................ ........................................................................... .............................................................. .................................. ... 74   10.3.1. General errors............................... errors.............................................................. ............................................................. ...................................................... ........................ 74  10.3.2. Parameterising Parameterising Error Errors s .......................... ......................................................... ............................................................. ................................................ .................. 84   10.3.3. Encoder Errors ......................... ....................................................... ............................................................. ............................................................ ............................. 85   10.3.4. Autotuning Autotuning Errors .................................................... .................................................................................. ........................................................... ............................. 89   10.3.5. Sensor adjustment errors ......................................................... ........................................................................................ ........................................... ............ 92  

11. AJDUSTMENT AND COMMISSIONING COMMISSIONING OF ASYNCHRONOUS INVERTERS (ASYNC) ............................ ............................ 93  11.1. Check of Connections Connections .......................................................... ......................................................................................... ....................................................... ........................ 93 

11.1.1. Inverter Inverter ............................ ........................................................... .............................................................. ............................................................. .................................. .... 93  11.1.2. Connection de VK2P weighing system (Optional) ....... ...................................... ............................................................. .............................. 96  11.1.3. Brake............................................... .............................................................................. .............................................................. .................................................. ................... 97  11.1.4. Encoder............................. Encoder............................................................ ............................................................. ............................................................. ................................... .... 97 

V0.01 – 04/2013

3

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 11.2. Initial Check of Parameters Parameters ............................... .............................................................. ............................................................. ........................................... ............. 99  11.3. Check of encoder, encoder, current sensors and run direction............................. ............................................................ .......................................... ........... 99  11.4. Adjustment of INT.00 and INT.01............................. ........................................................... ............................................................. .................................... ..... 100  11.5. Adjustment of rated speed (TR1.00) (TR1.00) ............................................................ ........................................................................................... ............................... 101  11.6. Adjustment of low speed (TR1.01) (TR1.01) .......................................... ........................................................................ ................................................... ..................... 101  11.7. Adjustment of S-curves S-curves ............................................................. ............................................................................................ ............................................... ................ 102   11.7.1. Standard curves .. ................................. .............................................................. .............................................................. ............................................... ................ 103  11.7.2. Sinusoidal Sinusoidal curves ............................................... ............................................................................. ............................................................. ................................. 104   11.7.3. Which curve type do we have to choose?........................... .......................................................... .................................................. ................... 105  11.7.4. Adjustment process for standard curves in open-loop mode....... ............... ............... ............... ............. ............ ............... .......... 105  11.7.5. Adjustment process for standard curves in closed-loop mode ........ ............... ............... ............... ............... ............... ........... .... 106  11.7.6. Adjustment process for sinusoidal curves in open-loop mode ................................................. 107   11.7.7. Adjustment process for sinusoidal curves in closed-loop mode ............................................... 108  11.8. Adjustment of levelling levelling .............................................. ............................................................................. .............................................................. ................................. 109  11.8.1. Stopping time (RSN.05) (RSN.05) ............................................ ........................................................................... ........................................................ ......................... 109   11.8.2. Load compensa compensation tion (RSN.06)........................... .......................................................... .............................................................. ................................... .... 109  11.8.3. Load compensation compensation and levelling levelling adjustment .......................................... ....................................................................... ............................. 109  11.8.3.1. Load compensation and levelling adjustment in open-loop (without encoder) ................... 110   11.8.3.2. Load compensation and levelling adjustment in closed-loop closed-l oop (with encoder) ........ ............... .............. ....... 111  11.9. Adjustment of short floors ........................... .......................................................... ............................................................. ............................................... ................. 114  11.9.1. What is a short floor?......................................................... ........................................................................................ ............................................... ................ 114   11.9.2. Adjustment aim.................................................. aim................................................................................. ............................................................. ................................ 114  11.9.3. How to adjust a short floor? ........................................................... .......................................................................................... .................................... ..... 114 

12. SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS ................................................................................ .............................................................................................................. ..............................116 

12.1. Checks of Connections Connections .......................................... ......................................................................... ............................................................. ..................................... ....... 116  12.1.1. Inverter Inverter ............................ ........................................................... .............................................................. ............................................................. ................................ .. 116  12.1.2. Brake .......................................... ......................................................................... .............................................................. ..................................................... ...................... 119  12.1.2.1.. Brake-varistor 12.1.2.1 Brake-varistor filter.......................................................... ......................................................................................... ......................................... .......... 120  12.1.2.2.. Brake microswitches 12.1.2.2 microswitches ................................................... .................................................................................. .............................................. ............... 120  12.1.3. Encoder............................. Encoder............................................................ ............................................................. ............................................................. ................................. .. 121  12.2. Inverter Inverter adjustmen adjustmentt ............................................................. ........................................................................................... .................................................... ...................... 124  12.2.1. Control system description description .............................. ............................................................ ............................................................. .................................... ..... 124  12.2.2. Process general overview ........................................................................ .................................................................................................. .......................... 125   12.2.3. Sinusoidal encoder check .............................................................. ............................................................................................. .................................... ..... 126  12.2.4. Initial review of parameters parameters .............. ............................................ ............................................................. ................................................... .................... 126   12.2.5. Absolute encoder encoder check............................. ........................................................... ............................................................. .......................................... ........... 126  12.2.6. Autotuning Autotuning ............................................................ ........................................................................................... .......................................................... ........................... 127  12.2.6.1.. Parameters 12.2.6.1 Parameters before autotuning ....................................... ...................................................................... ............................................. .............. 129  12.2.6.2.. Process execution 12.2.6.2 execution ...................................................................... ..................................................................................................... ............................... 130 

 

12.2.7. Adjustment speed control and curren currentt filter............................................................. ............................... ....................................... ......... 133 132 12.2.8. Check of theofrun direct direction ion ................................................... ................................................................................. .............................................. ................   12.2.9. Adjustment of S- curves............................ ........................................................... ............................................................. ......................................... ........... 134  12.2.9.1.. Standard curves .......................... 12.2.9.1 ......................................................... ............................................................. .............................................. ................ 135  12.2.9.2.. Sinusoidal 12.2.9.2 Sinusoidal curves.............................. ............................................................. ............................................................. ......................................... ........... 135  12.2.9.3.. Which type of curve to choose? 12.2.9.3 choose? ................................ ............................................................... .................................................. ................... 136  12.2.9.4.. Adjustment 12.2.9.4 Adjustment process for standard curves .......... ......................................... ............................................................ ............................. 136  12.2.9.5.. Adjustment 12.2.9.5 Adjustment process for sinusoid sinusoidal al curves.............................. ............................................................. ....................................... ........ 137  12.2.10. 12.2.1 0. Adjustment Adjustment of levelling levelling ...................................... ..................................................................... .............................................................. ............................... 138   12.2.10.1. 12.2.1 0.1. Stopping time (RSN.05).............................................................. ........................................................................................... ............................. 138  12.2.10.2. 12.2.1 0.2. Levellin Levelling g adjustment adjustment .................................................. ................................................................................ ............................................. ............... 138  12.2.11. 12.2.1 1. Adjustment Adjustment of short floors ..................................................................................... ............................................................................................... .......... 141   12.2.11.1. 12.2.1 1.1. What is a short floor? ...................................................... .................................................................................... ........................................ .......... 141   12.2.11.2. 12.2.1 1.2. Adjustment aim ........................................................ ....................................................................................... .............................................. ............... 141  12.2.11.3. 12.2.1 1.3. How to adjust a short floor? .................... .................................................. ............................................................. ................................... .... 141  12.2.12. 12.2.1 2. Adjustments Adjustments of position control. Starting and stoppin stopping g ....... ...................................... ................................................. .................. 143  12.2.13. 12.2.1 3. Adjustments Adjustments of brake ............................................................. ........................................................................................... ......................................... ........... 144  12.2.13.1. Opening and closing times. Reading R eading of the machine brake microswitche microswitches s ....... ............... ............... ......... 144  12.2.13.2. 12.2.1 3.2. Motor power failure .................................... ................................................................... ............................................................. .............................. 145  

13. OTHER SPECIAL FUNCTIONS ...................................................................... .................................................................................................... .................................. .... 14 147 7 

13.1. Adjustment of sensors ..................................... .................................................................... ............................................................. .......................................... ............ 147  13.1.1. General ....................................................... ..................................................................................... ............................................................. ...................................... ....... 147  13.1.2. Process execution.............................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................... ................ 147  13.1.3. Errors of adjustment of sensors............................. ........................................................... ............................................................. ............................... 148   V0.01 – 04/2013

4

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 13.2. Test Mode (asynchronous (asynchronous motors only) ............................................................. ....................................................................................... .......................... 148   13.2.1. General ....................................................... ..................................................................................... ............................................................. ...................................... ....... 148  13.2.2. Process execution.............................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................... ................ 149  13.3. 3VF Rescue Modes ......................................................................... ....................................................................................................... .......................................... ............ 150  13.3.1. General ....................................................... ..................................................................................... ............................................................. ...................................... ....... 150  13.3.2. DSP Rescue-5 batterie batteries s .................................................. ................................................................................ ................................................... ..................... 150  13.3.2.1.. Wiring (synchronous 13.3.2.1 (synchronous and asynchro asynchronous) nous)............................................................. ...................................................................... ......... 151  13.3.2.2.. Parameterisation 13.3.2.2 Parameterisation in asynchron asynchronous ous motor version .......................................................... .......................................................... 152 

 

13.3.2.3 13.3.2.3. Paramete risationion in.............................................................................. synchrono synchronous us motor version .. ................................ .......................................................... ............................ 13.3.2.4... Parameterisation 13.3.2.4 Process description descript ................................................ ................................................... ..................... 153 153  13.3.3. DSP Rescue-4 batterie batteries s .................................................. ................................................................................ ................................................... ..................... 155  13.3.3.1.. Wiring ................................................................. 13.3.3.1 ............................................................................................... .................................................... ...................... 155  13.3.3.2.. Parameterisation 13.3.3.2 Parameterisation ............................... ............................................................. ............................................................. ......................................... .......... 157  13.3.3.3.. Process description 13.3.3.3 description .............................................................................. ................................................................................................... ..................... 157  13.3.4. DSP-UPS Rescue (without batteries) ........................................................... ................................................................................... ........................ 159   13.3.4.1.. Wiring ................................................................. 13.3.4.1 ............................................................................................... .................................................... ...................... 159  13.3.4.2.. Parameterisation 13.3.4.2 Parameterisation ............................... ............................................................. ............................................................. ......................................... .......... 161  13.3.4.3.. Process Description 13.3.4.3 Description ................................................ .............................................................................. ................................................... ..................... 162  13.4. A3 Amendment Amendment .................................................... ................................................................................... ............................................................. ..................................... ....... 165  13.4.1. A3 Amendment Amendment for asynchronous motors (ASYNC) ............................................................... ............................................................... 166  13.4.1.1.. Parameters 13.4.1.1 Parameters ..................................................... .................................................................................... ......................................................... .......................... 166  13.4.1.2.. Errors 13.4.1.2 Errors......................... ....................................................... ............................................................. .............................................................. ................................. 168  13.4.2. A3 Amendment Amendment for synchronous synchronous motors (SYNC) ............................................................ ................................................................... ....... 168  13.4.2.1.. Parameters 13.4.2.1 Parameters ..................................................... .................................................................................... ......................................................... .......................... 168  13.4.2.2.. Errors 13.4.2.2 Errors......................... ....................................................... ............................................................. .............................................................. ................................. 170 

14. SOFTWARE UPDATING ................................ ............................................................... .............................................................. ................................................... .................... 171  14.1. Requirements Requirements and neede needed d elements ........................................ ....................................................................... ................................................... .................... 171   14.2. Process execution .............................................................................. ............................................................................................................. ...................................... ....... 171 

15. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................... ......................................................................................... ............................................ .............. 180  15.1. General features ............................. ............................................................ .............................................................. .......................................................... ........................... 180  15.2. Models, resistors, capacitors and filters............................................................. ....................................................................................... .......................... 182   15.2.1. Asynchronous Asynchronous inverte inverters rs ............................................................ .......................................................................................... ......................................... ........... 182  15.2.2. Synchronous Synchronous inverters inverters ............................................................. ........................................................................................... ......................................... ........... 182  15.3. Model and power of the inverter according to gearless configurations ............................................. 183  

APPENDIX A: PINOUT DEVICE NI USB-8473 A XC9 X C9 OF THE INVERTER ................................... ............................................... ............ 184  APPENDIX B: PINOUT OF THE ABSOLUTE/SINU ABSOLUTE/SINUSOIDAL SOIDAL ENCODER ADAPTER CABLE...........................185  APPENDIX C: EXTRACT OF EN81-1+A3 AMENDMENT ............ ........................................... .............................................................. ...............................186 

V0.01 – 04/2013

5

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 1. GENERAL 1.1. Scope of the manual This manual scope is the 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter, with software versions 911A or higher for asynchronous motors and versions 613 or higher for synchronous motors.

1.2. Use guideline of this manual  manual  This manual must be used to work in a safe way with the 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter. It contains the safety instructions to be complied with and the required information in order to get the proper functioning of the inverter. This manual has to be kept together with the equipment to ensure all the staff involved in working with it can get the documentation at any moment. This manual also contains the instructions, guidelines and safety rules for the proper handling of the equipment. This manual must be saved for its daily use and it has to be forwarded to all the final owners and customers.

1.3. Recipients The recipients of this documentation are those persons in charge of the planning, adjustment and maintenance who have been duly trained and instructed to work with this kind of equipment.

1.4. Document structure This document structure obeys information accessibility criteria. It must be a support for the installation, adjustment and solution of problems, without sacrificing the rigour of the provided information. This is the reason why a complete chapter has been devoted to the commissioning guide, another chapter to the parameters, another one to the errors and a series of appendixes to complete all the provided information has been included as well.

1.5. Liability exclusions The coherence of the supplied instructions in this manual, as well as the described hardware and software have been checked. Despite that, we cannot ensure there is no error or discrepancy. The contents of this manual will be submitted to periodic checks. The required modifications will be incorporated in next version. MP Lifts takes no responsibility for the caused damages due to a misuse or a mistaken, improper, incorrect or inappropriate use of the inverter, neither for the consequences resulting from non-authorised modifications or repairs.

1.6. Copyright This manual contains information covered by copyright. No part of this manual may be photocopied, reproduced, translated or published in whole or in part without the express prior consent of MP Lifts. MP Lifts shall not be liable for any modification that has not been submitted to its express approval, neither for the damages this may cause. All rights reserved.

1.7. Symbols Asynchronous Motors The contents that appear near to this symbol are specifically referred to asynchronous motors.

Synchronous Motors The contents that appear near to this symbol are specifically referred to synchronous motors. 

V0.01 – 04/2013

6

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 2. SAFETY INFORMATION 2.1. General This chapter contains instructions to prevent personal injury and material damage. These instructions may be incomplete. In the event of doubt or problem, please contact MP Staff.

2.2. Inverter use 3VFMAC-DSP 6P is a frequency inverter devoted to the control of 3-phase motors. Any other use of the inverter shall be considered inappropriate. The reading of the instructions included in the present manual and their compliance, particularly those ones referred to the safety, are considered a part of the appropriate use. Besides, the achievement of periodic inspections is also a part of the appropriate use. The inverter technician and not the manufacturer will be responsible for the personal and/or material damages resulting from an inappropriate use.

2.3. Product safety The product shall meet the quality and performance standards in effect at the time of delivery. The delivered product is mainly secure and reliable. The inverter and its additional or complementary  complementary  elements must be used in fault-free conditions and they must be installed and used according to the use instructions. A use that exceeds the limits set out in Chapter 15 can lead to deterioration of the inverter.

2.4. Requirements for staff The persons in charge of planning, installation, adjustment and maintenance of the inverters must have the required qualification, aptitudes and training to carry out the job. Based on their knowledge and experience, they must recognize the potential risks of such a job. They must be aware of the safety regulations and guidelines for the prevention of accidents at the European, national and regional levels. Only staff trained for this purpose is allowed to operate and the apprentices will only do it under supervision.

2.5. Commissioning WARNING During the equipment commissioning, unexpected situations of risk may happen, due to a defective installation, faulty components, a bad adjustment or wrong electrical connections. During the adjustment, we must ensure the following points:

• 

No persons or objects are objects are in the danger area. The EMERGENCY STOP devices shall work properly.

•  • 

The overspeed governor (and all the other mechanical brakes) shall be activated. Compliance with applicable regulations and standards during the adjustment and commissioning.

• 

2.6. Working on the inverter. Dangers due to residual voltage Before starting to work on inverters which have already been installed or in installation process, ensure that they are disconnected and cut off from the mains voltage. Also, take all the required measures to make impossible any inadvertent reconnection. There is a mortal danger of electrocution, even after the inverter has been disconnected, as its capacitors include electrical components containing energy that might have been charged due to a malfunction.

When you want to manipulate the inverter, you must disconnect the power supply (R, S, T) and WAIT UNTIL THE LED DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE IS COMPLETELY OFF. Otherwise, there is a risk of electrical shock that can cause death. 2.7. Modifications/actions on the inverter For safety reasons, it is forbidden to perform on own behalf interventions and modifications on the equipment. All the modifications must be expressly approved by the manufacturer. Only materials/accessories supplied/recommended by MP must be used. These materials/accessories have been officially approved for use on the inverter. Otherwise, we cannot guarantee that they meet the relevant charge and safety standards. The spare parts and the special equipment that are not supplied/recommended by MP are not allowed for use on the device.

V0.01 – 04/2013

7

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 2.8. Duties for the installer/maintenance installer/maintenance staff The equipment has been designed to comply with the standard specifications associated to the model and also with the required level of protection. However, to reach an effective safety, all the safety standards associated to all the installation elements have to be complied with. The implementation and planning of these measures are part of the competences of the installing/maintenance company. This one must ensure that the staffs working on the inverter take all these measures and get them complied with. Particularly, the installing/maintenance company must ensure that: •  •  •  •  •  •  •  • 

• 

The inverter is used within its specifications. The proper functioning of the installation, paying a special attention to all the safety devices and to their periodical inspections. The required protection equipment for the installation and maintenance staffs is available and operative. The manual is beside the inverter and in good order. The staffs operating on the inverter is duly qualified. The staffs operating on the equipment use the safety equipment. All the safety and warning notes stuck to the equipment remain there and are never removed. The staffs operating on the inverter are regularly trained on the relevant safety issues of the job and have access to the  the   relevant information about use instructions, particularly to those ones referred to safety. All the safety and warning information is not removed and remains readable.

V0.01 – 04/2013

8

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 3. GENERAL OVERVIEW OF THE 3VFMAC-DSP 6P 3.1. Application field The range of 3VFMAC-DSP frequency inverters is specifically designed for lift installations. It includes functions and configuration parameters that bring unique features to the frequency inverter applied to lifts with asynchronous and synchronous drive machines.

3.2. Functional description 3.2.1. General features With two access levels to parameters, the MP’s inverter handling is quick and easy. The parameter banks include functions like: S-curves, stop ramps, speed and current control, electronic motor protection, timers, external brake control, output frequency up to 65 Hz, regulation of the output voltage and monitoring the output phases. It allows real-time viewing of the most important electrical magnitudes. 3VFMAC-DSP 6P can operate in conventional open-loop control (voltage-frequency) and in closed-loop control. In the latter case, the inverter is able to supply up to 200% of rated torque at rotation speed 0 in a motor with the same power of the frequency inverter. FEATURES   FEATURES    

 

 

             

Control of asynchronous and synchronous motors. Operating on battery power for emergency rescue. It detects the favourable direction of the load and carries out the lift motion at low speed using 5 batteries of 12 volts which are connected on the bus of continuous voltage. Emergency rescue without batteries for synchronous motors and with 4 batteries for asynchronous motors. Due to compatibility reasons, it also incorporates the rescue with 5 batteries, both for asynchronous and synchronous motors. It complies with standard EN-81 + A3 amendment, related to uncontrolled movements of the lift when the car is at landing level, with open doors, both with synchronous (from version 613) and asynchronous (from version 911A) motors. Static autotuning. Machine modeling by direct parameterisation of the electric constants of the motor (closed-loop control, synchronous motor). Self-adjustment of the sinusoidal encoder signals. Table of motors' characteristic values such as no load current, number of poles and machine constants. Current limiter of output to motor (synchronous motor). Configurability of the motion direction. Available communication interfaces RS-485, ENDAT, SSI, Serial TTL and CAN-BUS allowing the monitoring and remote control.  “User-friendly”  “User-f riendly” modula modularr programmin programming g interfac interface e via com computer puter or “on-boa “on-board” rd” ke keyboard yboard..

COMFORT IMPROVEMENTS  

     

       

 

Removal of the roll-back effect at starting. With asynchronous motors, it is achieved by using the VK2P weighing system; with synchronous motors, it incorporates the function of position control at starting and stopping. No electrical noise from the motor due to switching frequencies of up to 20 KHz in asynchronous motors and up to 14 KHz in synchronous, which allows its installation in machine room less lifts. Extra travel quality due to the automatic minimum jerk adjustment when starting and stopping, which removes the disgusting sensation caused by the acceleration at the starting and stopping moments. Characterisation of short ramps with two parameters: increase of target speed and hold speed timer. The converter uses these two data to automatically adjust the curve, with the same aim of comfort and the travel time at slow speed is reduced. Second order current filter removing the resonance frequencies generated by synchronous motors. Second order current advanced filter, with parameterisable cut off frequency, removing the resonance frequencies generated by synchronous motors. Direct access through absolute positioning, which allows the approach section to be removed, eliminating unnecessary waiting time for users  1. Progressive starting. For lifts with a backpack frame, there is an initial jerk due to the frame interlock on the guide rails. This feature makes possible to define a time interval during which a constant acceleration is applied, thereby removing the initial jolt felt in the car. It adds specific features for lifts, particularly affecting the comfort (5 S-curves) and the levelling.

 Coming

1

soon 

V0.01 – 04/2013

9

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 3.2.2. Control system The inverter and the control board communicate each other via inputs and outputs. The reception r eception of external commands is achieved via voltage-free contacts. The inverter includes three outputs for the control of: - Triac of contactors. - Brake relay. - Speed limit relay. There are two banks of speed and acceleration which will be activated by activating inputs provided for that purpose.

3.2.3. Operating modes The 3VFMAC-DSP 6P has two operating modes: RUN Mode and PROGRAMMING   or SETUP Mode, as shown on the following diagram:

󰁎󰁏 󰁥󰁮󰁥󰁲󰁧󰁹 󰁯󰁵󰁴󰁰󰁵󰁴 󰁓󰁔󰁏󰁐󰀺 󰁉󰁤󰁬󰁥 󰁳󰁴󰁡󰁴󰁥 󰁷󰁡󰁩󰁴󰁩󰁮󰁧 󰁦󰁯󰁲 󰁡 󰁲󰁵󰁮 󰁣󰁯󰁭󰁭󰁡󰁮󰁤 󰁴󰁨󰁲󰁯󰁵󰁧󰁨 󰁘󰁃󰀱󰀰󰀯󰁘󰁃󰀲 󰁩󰁮󰁰󰁵󰁴󰁳󰀮 󰁗󰁯󰁲󰁫󰁩󰁮󰁧 󰁭󰁯󰁤󰁥 󰁔󰁷󰁯 󰁰󰁯󰁳󰁳󰁩󰁢󰁬󰁥 󰁳󰁴󰁡󰁴󰁥󰁳

󰁅󰁮󰁥󰁲󰁧󰁹 󰁯󰁵󰁴󰁰󰁵󰁴 󰁒󰁕󰁎󰀺 󰁔󰁨󰁥 󰁩󰁮󰁶󰁥󰁲󰁴󰁥󰁲 󰁩󰁳 󰁭󰁡󰁫󰁩󰁮󰁧 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁥󰁬󰁥󰁶󰁡󰁴󰁯󰁲 󰁭󰁯󰁶󰁥

󰁏󰁰󰁥󰁲󰁡󰁴󰁩󰁮󰁧 󰁭󰁯󰁤󰁥󰁳

󰁍󰁡󰁣󰁨󰁩󰁮󰁥 󰁩󰁤󰁬󰁥

󰁍󰁡󰁣󰁨󰁩󰁮󰁥 󰁷󰁯󰁲󰁫󰁩󰁮󰁧

󰁓󰁥󰁴󰁵󰁰 󰁍󰁯󰁤󰁥 FIGURE 3.1 As shown, in RUN mode, two possible states are set out: Stop, where the inverter does not give energy and the machine remains idle and ready for running and Run, the inverter gives energy and the machine is working. In RUN mode, both stop and run states, no parameter can be modified.   In this state, magnitudes such as speed, voltage, current, etc. can be real-time monitored. In PROGRAMMING or SETUP mode, the values of the parameters can be edited and adjusted. As we shall see later on, we can know at any moment whether the inverter is in RUN (Stopped or Running) or in PROGRAMMING mode because it is provided with both a console and a led to inform about its present state.

3.2.4. Parameterisation and monitoring The parameters are gathered in significant sheets or groups: Bank 1 of speed (TR1), Bank 2 of speed (TR2), Encoder (ENC), etc. The feature associated to the group or sheet is characterised into each sheet. 3VFMAC-DSP 6P offers a comfortable, easy and very operative technique of parameterisation (equipment configuration).   configuration). In addition, the real-time the real-time viewing of the most outstanding electrical magnitudes is available: current consumption by motor, speed, target speed, voltage of capacitors, etc.

V0.01 – 04/2013

10

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 3.3. Outstanding parts of the equipment 3.3.1. LEDs 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter includes a total of 16 LEDs, divided into three banks of SMD LEDs and 2 additional discrete LEDs, located on the inverter board, as shown on the picture:

PICTURE 3.1

The purpose of these LEDs is to inform about the inverter state, thereby they are a precious help to solve and debug problems, or to adjust the inverter.

3.3.1.1. LED Bank 1: Inputs for control board commands and contactor reading

º PICTURE 3.2

V0.01 – 04/2013

11

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter The following table shows the meaning of each LED, depending on its state (on/off), as well as the identification of the associated connector and terminal:

LED

DESCRIPTION

13

Running command

14

Speed command

STATE ON

Running command

OFF

Stopping command

ON

High speed

OFF

Slow speed

ON

Rated speed/Approach: TR2.00 and TR2.01, respectively. Rated speed/ Approach: TR1.00 and TR1.01, respectively. Normal Mode

OFF

Inspection Mode

ON

15

2nd Speed Bank OFF

16

Inspection

ON

17

2nd Acceleration Bank OFF

18

Direction command Error Reset

19 Reading of coil state Interlocking of governor (EN-81+ A3 amendment

Acceleration/Deceleration Time: TR2.02, TR2.04. Curve modification factor: TR2.03, TR2.05. Acceleration/Deceleration Time: TR2.02, TR2.04. Curve modification factor: TR2.03, TR2.05.

ON

Upward command

OFF

Downward command

ON OFF

Signal of error RESET activated Signal of error RESET deactivated If N/CLOSED (4), brake closed. If N/OPEN (4), brake open.

ON Reading of brake microswitches (synchronous)

MEANING

OFF

CONNECTOR/TERMINAL  CONNECTOR/TERMINAL  Voltage-free input. Connector XC2/XC10(2): Terminals 11 (common), 13 Voltage-free input. Connector XC2/XC10(2): Terminals 11 (common), 14 Voltage-free input. Connector XC2/XC10(2): Terminals 11 (common), 15 Voltage-free input. Connector XC2/XC10(2): Terminals 11 (common), 16. IMPORTANT : negative logic signal: ON = NO INSPECTION. Voltage-free input. Connector XC2/XC10(2): Terminals 11 (common), 17

Voltage-free input. (2) Connector XC2/XC10 : Terminals 11 (common), 18

If N/CLOSED (4), brake open. If N/OPEN (4), brake closed.

ON

Overspeed governor interlocking

OFF

Overspeed governor released

Voltage-free input. Connector XC2(3):Terminals 11 (common), 19

Asynchronous) TABLE 3.1 Should you need further information about inverter control signals, refer to chapter 9.

2

  The inputs of the control board commands can be received by the inverter via connector XC2, if it is a MicroBasic or a non-MP Controller, and via connector XC10, if it is a Via Serie Controller. 3

 

 The input signal of ERROR RESET/READING OF BRAKE MICROSWITCHES/COIL STATE is only enabled at the terminal 19 of connector XC2, NEVER via  

connector XC10 (Via Serie commands).  4

 The logic will be given to the inverter by the parameter STC.08.  V0.01 – 04/2013

12

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 3.3.1.2. LED Bank 2: Input for the rescue signal and voltage-free outputs SILK-SCREEN PRINTING

BANK

EM

DESCRIPTION

CONNECTOR/TERMINAL

Rescue signal. Voltage-free input. It is used to activate the automatic rescue, with and without batteries, for both motor.synchronous and asynchronous There are 3 uses for this output:

Connector XC6. For DSP-5 battery-rescue, terminals 20 and 23. For DSP-4 battery-rescue or DSPUPS-rescue, terminals 21 and 23. Connector XC4, terminals 32-33.

1) Speed limit relay. 2) Activator of the coil for overspeed governor interlocking (asynchronous + A3 amendment).

SP 3) Inverter activity monitor. This output goes to a control board input in order to report if the inverter is activated and ready for travelling (synchronous + A3 amendment).

Bank 2

K BK

Voltage-free output. Contactor output (triac) Voltage-free output. Brake activation relay. Voltage-free output.

Connector XC4, terminals 34-35. Connector XC4, terminals 36-37.

TABLE 3.2

3.3.1.3. LED Bank 3: Indicators BANK

SILK-SCREEN PRINTING

RS-485

ENCODER Bank 3

DESCRIPTION Reports on the state of the communication with the weighing system VK2P (asynchronous motors only). If the communication is good enough, the led will be blinking. Otherwise, it will be off. Reports on the state of the communication with the absolute encoder (synchronous motors only). If the communication is good enough, the led will be blinking.

TABLE 3.3

V0.01 – 04/2013

13

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 3.3.1.4. LED Run Green LED located at the right part of the console, together with the keyboard.

PICTURE 3.3 This LED function is to report on the inverter operation state:

STATE OFF FIXED, ON BLINKING, ON

DESCRIPTION The inverter is in PROGRAM or SETUP mode. The inverter is in standby state to start a service (RUN mode, Stopped). The inverter is making a service (RUN mode, Running). TABLE 3.4

This LED informs in an indirect way that the equipment is powered. If it does not switch on when applying power, the connections R, S and T must be checked as well as the fuses F3 and F4 (maximum permitted value 1 Amp).

3.3.1.5. LED “DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE” Red LED. It informs about a high level of current during the power stage of the equipment.

PICTURE 3.4 During the time the equipment is being powered, i.e. the LED RUN is on, if the LED DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE is off, the whole equipment shall be replaced.

Whenever you want to handle the inverter, you must disconnect the power supply (R, S, T) and WAIT UNTIL THE LED “DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE” IS COMPLETELY OFF. Otherwise, there is a risk of electric shock that may cause death.

V0.01 – 04/2013

14

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 3.3.2. Fuses The mission of the fuses is to protect the inverter against voltage surges, ground faults and/or short circuits. 3VFMAC-DSP 6P is provided with four fuses, located on the board as shown in below picture.

PICTURE 3.5

3.3.2.1. Fuse F1  It protects the equipment power stage. If the inverter is powered via R, S, T, i.e., if the LED RUN is on, and the LED DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE is off, we may conclude that the fuse is burnt. In this case, the complete equipment must be replaced.

NEVER REPLACE THE FUSE BY ANOTHER ONE, NOR MAKE SHUNTS BETWEEN ITS TERMINALS: YOU MAY CAUSE CAU SE THE EQUIPMENT EXPLOSION.

V0.01 – 04/2013

15

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 3.3.2.2. Fuse F2 (1A)   It protects the power supply of 10 Vdc that powers: . Fans (terminals (+), (-)). . Encoder of magnets (terminals 20 - 21 - 22). . Control inputs (terminals from 11 to 19). If the fuse burns, check the proper connection of the mentioned elements.

The may valuecause of this fuse is 2A. ThisCOMPLETE is the MAXIMUM VALUE. Do not change it for higher values; you THE EQUIPMENT DESTRUCTION. 3.3.2.3. Fuses F3 (1A), F4 (1A)   It protects the inputs/outputs area of the inverter. If it repeatedly burns, the complete equipment must be replaced.

The value of these fuses is 1A. This is the MAXIMUM VALUE. Do not change it for higher values; you may cause THE EQUIPMENT COMPLETE DESTRUCTION. 3.3.3. Relays + Triac

PICTURE 3.6

V0.01 – 04/2013

16

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter The inverter is provided with three voltage-free output signals which are controlled by the 2 relays and one triac located as shown in the previous picture. These are: - KRL1 This relay can be used for 3 different functions, depending on the motor type and whether the installation includes or not the EN81 + A3 amendment: overspeed governor interlocking, inverter state monitoring and speed limit relay, as shown in following diagram:

(1) Overspeed governor Interlocking/Release . This function is available for asynchronous inverters including A3 amendment activation. The output logic of this signal is the following one: Open relay (led SP off): Overspeed governor interlocking Closed relay (led SP off): Overspeed governor release (2) Inverter state monitoring. monitoring. This function is available for synchronous inverters with A3 amendment feature activated. Through this signal, the inverter informs the control board about its state: Open relay (led SP off): Inverter offline Closed relay (led SP off): Inverter online/ready

(3) Limit speed relay . It switches when the value set in parameter TR0.01 is exceeded. In open-loop control, it switches when the output electric frequency exceeds it. In closed-loop control, it switches when the actual rotation speed of the motor exceeds it. The activation logic can be determined in the parameter TR0.02.

- KRL2: TRIAC FOR CONTROL OF CONTACTORS  CONTACTORS  It controls, in series with the controller safety chain, the activation and deactivation of contactors, in coordination with the brake control (KRL3). - KRL3: RELAY FOR BRAKE CONTROL It controls, in series with the contactors, the opening and closing of the drive machine brake, in coordination with the control of contactors (KRL2).

V0.01 – 04/2013

17

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 3.3.4. Monitoring and Programming Interface Built with five displays of 7 segments + decimal full stop D1, D2, D3, D4 y D5 and four keys P/R , ,  y . This set, also called console “on-board”, enables all the tasks of electric magnitude monitoring to be made during the operation and configuration of the equipment features.

PICTURE 3.7

V0.01 – 04/2013

18

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 3.4. Mains power connections

PICTURE 3.8

CONNECTOR

ITEM REF. ON PICTURE 3.8

R, S, T

1 2

XC12

V0.01 – 04/2013

DESCRIPTION Three-phase Input 400 Vac If automatic rescue (5-batteries, 4-batteries or without batteries): batteries) : Three-phase 400 Vac Input. Fuses F3 and F4 not there.

If NO automatic rescue: rescue: Connector not used. Fuses F3 and F4 there.

19

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter CONNECTOR

ITEM REF. ON PICTURE 3.8

U, V, W

3

-CE,+CE

4, 7

External connection of capacitors. Only connect the set of electrolytic capacitors which is supplied together with the equipment.

C1, C2

5, 6

External power bridge through contactors K1/K2. Il will be compulsory implemented by putting in series a power contact of each contactor.

DESCRIPTION Output phases to motor

If automatic rescue with 5 batteries: batteries : -CE and C3 isolated.

C3: Connection of the batteries positive terminal of the rescue device. –CE: negative batteries terminal.

+CE/C2, C3

7,8

IMPORTANT NOTE : Both points must be FULL isolated. In any other case (4 batteries-DSP Rescue, UPS-DSP Rescue): Rescue) : C3 joined to +CE/C2 by the plate provided for this purpose.

V0.01 – 04/2013

20

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter CONNECTOR

ITEM REF. ON PICTURE 3.8

DESCRIPTION As already stated in this table, C1 is used for the external power bridge through contactors K1/K2 and -CE as the connection point of the negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitors. Furthermore, these two connection points can be used for other connections, depending on whether or not the inverter includes automatic rescue; and, if yes, depending on the rescue type.

Machine

Automatic Rescue

Description

WITHOUT RESCUE

C1 (faston): Contactors (faston): Contactors bridge. Cable crosssection according to power.

5 BATTERIESRESCUE

4 BATTERIESRESCUE

C1, -CE

4,5

WITHOUT RESCUE

5 BATTERIESRESCUE

Configuration

-CE : Capacitors negative terminal (faston/ring). Cable cross-section according to power. C1 (faston): Contactors (faston): Contactors bridge. Cable crosssection according to power. -CE : Capacitors negative terminal (faston/ring). Cable cross-section according to power. -CE : Rescue negative terminal (ring). Cable cross-section according to power. C1 (faston): Contactors (faston): Contactors bridge. Cable crosssection according to power. -CE : Rescue negative terminal (ring). Cable cross-section according to power. C1: C1: Double faston. It is provided with two connections: Contactors bridge with diameter according to power and rescue positive terminal, red and cable-cross section 0.4.

RESCUE WITHOUT BATTERIES

-CE : Capacitors negative terminal (faston/ring). Cable cross-section according to power -CE : Rescue negative terminal (ring). Cable cross-section 0.4.

B1, B2

9

External connection of brake resistor TABLE 3.5

VERY IMPORTANT: The connections of areas 2, 4, 5, 7 and 8, as well as the presence or not of the fuses F3 and F4 depend on the equipment configuration: WITHOUT rescue, WITH 4-batteries automatic rescue + contactor KPW, WITH 5-batteries automatic rescue + contactors KG/KUPS or automatic rescue WITHOUT batteries. V0.01 – 04/2013

21

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 3.5. Input command connections

PICTURE 3.9

CONNECTOR

ITEM REF. ON PICTURE 3.9

XC13

1

DESCRIPTION Reading of the contactors coil activation Input of non-MP and MicroBasic command signals.

XC2

2

Signal reading of ERROR RESET/BRAKE MICROSWITCHES/ STATE OF COIL FOR OVERSPEED GOVERNOR INTERLOCKING (Terminal 19).

XC10

3

Input signals for Via Serie control board commands.

XC8 XC6

4.a 4.b

Input for non-MP encoder and sinusoidal encoder.

Low cost encoder : Terminals 20 (+10V), 21 (0V) ,22 (impulse reading)

XC3

5

Input for rescue signal : - If DSP Rescue-5 batteries : batteries : Terminals 20, 23 - If DSP Rescue-4 batteries, DSP Rescue-UPS: Rescue-UPS : Terminals 21, 23

V0.01 – 04/2013

22

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter CONNECTOR

ITEM REF. ON PICTURE 3.9

DESCRIPTION Voltage-free outputs:

XC4

6

32, 33: 33: RL1. Relay of speed limit/Interlocking activation  /Monitoring of inverter  /Monitoring inverter state. 34, 35 : RL2. Triac to control contactors 36, 37 : RL3. Relay to control machine brake. With absolute encoder (synchronous only): only) : XC5: Data (differential, bidirectional) XC7: Clock (differential)

XC5 XC7

7.a 7.b

With VK2P (weighing system)  system)  (optional, asynchronous only) XC5: Communication RS-485 (bidirectional) XC7: Not used

TABLE 3.6

3.6. Communication Interfaces

PICTURE 3.10

V0.01 – 04/2013

23

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter CONNECTOR

PICTURE

XC9

1

PROGRAM

2

DESCRIPTION Communication CAN Control 50 : CAN_H 49 : CAN_L 48 : Ground/Negative This interface is used for monitoring, for Management of Errors and for reading/writing of parameters. Interface series communication  communication  It is used for the software updating and as communication interface with MPConfig (reading/writing of parameters) and with Management of Errors. The interface 3VFMAC-DSP/Universal-RS232 connected in this connector.

will

be

TABLA 3.7

3.7. Models The 3VFMAC-DSP 6P models available are: • 3VFMAC-DSP

6P 10 / Up to 10 HP. There are two versions:

- Version 400: 400 Vac -15%, +10% - Version 220: 220 Vac -15%, +10% • 

3VFMAC-DSP 6P 15 / Up to 15 HP - Version 400: 400 Vac -15%, +10%

• 

3VFMAC-DSP 6P 20 / Up to 20 HP - Version 400: 400 Vac -15%, +10%

For further details, refer to “Chapter 15: Technical specifications”.  specifications”. 

V0.01 – 04/2013

24

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter   4. GENERAL DIMENSIONS

        0         7

        2         0         2

        3         4         2

        7         2         1

        5         2

176

H

176

W

W

L

H

10-15 HP 190

257 135

190

257 160

20 HP L

V0.01 – 04/2013

25

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 5. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 5.1. Asynchronous

(1)

10Cv / 15 Cv / 20Cv (400Vac)

K1 +

W

-

+CE

+

-CE

K2

M ~3

V -

U

10Cv (220Vac)

MACHINE

C1

C2

R

THREE-PHASE POWER SUPPLY

FILTER

U

V

+

+

+CE

-

-

-CE

W

PCB

B2

S

3VF DSP

T

BRAKING RESISTOR B1

TWO-PHASE POWER SUPPLY (Automatic rescue case)

400Vac 0Vac

XC12 +CE (1)

11

RUN V1 V2 V3 AC REV / FWD PROG 1

13

-CE

14 15 16

XC2

50

XC9

49 48

17

CAN COMUNICATION (Not available)

18 19

XC3 0Vac

23 22

AUTOMATIC RESCUE CONNECTIONS

21 20

11

K2

K1

12

XC13

CONTROL OF CONTACTORS

5 PROG 2

SAFETY CHAIN (110 Vac)

4

32

XC6

33 34

XC4

35

24Vdc

3 2

C2C2+ C1C1+

ENC

1

36 37

BRAKE CONTROL

KRFR

       )        )    -      +        (        (

FORCED FAN SYSTEM

0Vdc

V0.01 – 04/2013

26

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 5.2. Synchronous

K1 W (1)

K2

M

10Cv / 15 Cv / 20Cv (400Vac)

V +

~3 U

-

+CE

+

-CE

MACHINE -

C1

C2

R

THREE-PHASE POWER SUPPLY

FILTER

U

V

PCB 3VF DSP

S T

W

B2

BRAKING RESISTOR B1

TWO-PHASE POWER SUPPLY (Automatic rescue case)

400Vac 0Vac

XC12 +CE (1)

11

RUN V1 V2 V3 AC REV / FWD PROG 1

13

-CE

14 15 16

50

XC2

XC9 49 48

17

CAN COMUNICATION (Not available)

18 23

19

22

XC3 0Vac

21

AUTOMATIC RESCUE CONNECTIONS

20 11 12

K1

K2

CONTROL OF CONTACTORS

XC13

42

XC8 41 T4

PROG 2

SAFETY CHAIN (110 Vac)

24Vdc

32

XC7 T3

33

7

34

6

XC6

XC4

35

1

36

T2

XC5 T1

37

BRAKE CONTROL

KRFR

B CLK  /CLK  /A A

ENC

 /DATA DATA

       )        )    -      +        (        (

FORCED FAN SYSTEM

0Vdc

V0.01 – 04/2013

 /B

27

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 6. ADDITIONAL ELEMENTS 6.1. Encoder We have to distinguish between asynchronous and synchronous machines:

- In asynchronous machines: the encoder use is optional, although it is highly recommended as it significantly improves the lift performance in regard with energy efficiency, control and comfort. Two encoder types can be installed: • 

Industrial Encoder. TTL. 5 Volts.

• 

Magnet Encoder or low cost.

- In synchronous machines: the machines: the encoder use is mandatory, as this type of machines can only be controlled in closed-loop mode. For this kind of machines, the used encoder includes both the Endat01 absolute encoder technology and the incremental sinusoidal 1Vpp technology. The encoder use allows the flux vector control by 3VFMAC-DSP 6P with feedback of the speed reading (closedloop). This brings the following advantages: 1.

Significant improvement in levelling. During the approach speed, the flux vector control guarantees that the motor always rotates at the same speed, independently of the existing load in the car. Furthermore, parameter RSN.05 (which is only operative in flux vector control) allows adjusting the levelling with absolute accuracy. As a final result, independently of the existing load in the car, the levelling point is always the same.

2.

Overtorque. The main virtue of the flux vector control is to allow reaching the maximum possible motor torque over the entire frequency range. Thereby, in the event of overloads in car, the lift behaviour is much more reliable.

3.

Electricity consumption reduction. The reduction in energy involved by the use of frequency inverter over other solutions (2-speeds, voltage inverter...) is well known. But, when operating with flux vector control the consumption is further more reduced compared to the conventional open-loop solution, because the equipment reduces very significantly the consumed current whenever the required torque is almost naught (for instance: half-loaded car). This also provides greater durability to the equipment.

4.

Operating global reliability. The closed-loop control tends to make the motor rotate very close to theoretical curve of speed, due to the optimum dynamic response of the set.

These advantages apply to both synchronous and asynchronous machines.

V0.01 – 04/2013

28

MTELCVFDSP6P 001 EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 6.1.1. Industrial encoder (asynchronous motors only) 3VFMAC-DSP 6P frequency inverter is provided with a connector (XC6) to allow using an industrial encoder. It is recommended and mandatory to use it when the selected machine is  VVVF type.  It is located in motor and makes the equipment can know in real time the rotation speed. It will have to be supplied together with the machine, and its features will be: . Power supply 5 Vdc . Two outputs of pulse trains . Recommendable 2000 pulses per turn (valid between 500 and 5000) . Differential output, RS-442 or line driver. Power supply 5 Vdc. The connector XC6 includes following connections: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5:

Cable shield of the encoder (to ground). Reading of pulses C1 (+). Reading of pulses C1 (-). Reading of pulses C2 (+). Reading of pulses C2 (-).

The figure shows the connection between this encoder and 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter.

+24

 

0Vdc

PCB

󰁅󰁎󰁃󰁏󰁄󰁅󰁒 󰁐󰁏󰁗󰁅󰁒 󰁓󰁕󰁐󰁐󰁌󰁙

+5

0Vdc

External Shield

1 2 3 4 5

1

 Vertically connected

XC6

XC6

Encoder 

 Vdc 0  A+  AB+

C2+ C2+   -   C1+ C1- C2+C2-

B0+ 0-

XENC

2 3 4 5

XENC

+ C1+ C1C2+ C2Not connected Not connected  

FIGURE 6.1

To ensure the proper motion of the car and to make it properly coincide with the encoder reading, you must perform the following actions in the specified order: 1. Set the equipment to make it operate in open-loop mode (CNF.00=0). Make the car move and confirm it goes upwards when the ascent order is given (and vice versa). If the car motion is in the opposite direction to the commanded one, exchange 2 phases in the power connectors of output to the motor inside the controller (terminals U, V, W). Confirm that now the motion coincides with the given order. 2. After that, connect the encoder. Be especially careful, because the encoder can be deteriorated if the connections are not properly done. Confirm that the number of motor poles (DRI.03) and the number of encoder pulses (ENC.00) have been set to the proper values. 3. The following checks must be done in stop, in upwards and downwards. The encoder will be OK if and only if the three conditions related here below are complied with:

V0.01 – 04/2013

29

MTELCVFDSP6P 001 EN

29

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter •  Stopped . The "Encod" value will be displayed. We will touch the encoder connector; we will smoothly pull the cables. The value should remain at 0. If not, the encoder connection shall be checked. •  Upwards Upwards.. The "UEL"   viewing must be a positive value and very close to "FrEC" , the "E5"   viewing must also be positive and close to "FrEC"  and  and the value of "Encod" counter counter  shall be decreasing. •  Downwards Downwards.. The "UEL"   viewing must be a negative value and its absolute value very close to "FrEC" , the "E5"  viewing  viewing must also be negative and its absolute value close to "FrEC"   and and the value of "Encod"  counter  counter shall be increasing.

If all the specified conditions are not met in any of the  the   described situations, there is a problem with the encoder. The most common problems related to the encoder are: a) While the lift is moving, upwards or downwards, if the “Encod” viewing value remains at zero, it means there is a connection error in the encoder (power supply, a non-connected channel). Check once more the connections. b) In the "UEL" viewing, if   a rotation speed with opposite sign to the electric frequency of “E5” output appears, it means that the two channels of the pulse train are connected in reverse order. To correct the order, the channels must be exchanged one another; i.e., exchange the cable C1 + for the C2 + and the C1 – for the C2 -. c) If “UEL” and “E5” values have the same sign, but they differ significantly, check parameters DRI.03 (number of poles) and ENC.00 (number of encoder pulses). After the above mentioned points have been checked, repeat all the operations included in this section from the beginning. 4. Introduce the value of motor no-load current in parameter INT.00. It is more or less equal to the current consumed by the motor when operating in open-loop mode (CNF.00=0), at rated speed, when the car is empty and moving upwards. Read this current on the equipment display, introduce it on INT.00. Set the inverter in closed-loop mode (CNF.00=1). First, in inspection mode or rescue mode and, after, in normal mode, make the car travel several times. As a precautionary measure, lower the high speed (TR1.00), just in case there is any kind of problem. At this moment, if there are vibrations or if error 05 or error 11 appears, check the proper connection to ground of the encoder shield, at the connection of the encoder to the controller, as shown in below picture:

PICTURE 6.1 Regarding to inverter configuration, configuration, to ensure the inverter proper functioning, we must: 1. Check that the machine number of poles is correct (parameter DRI.03). 2. Set the value of parameter ENC.00 (encoder number of pulses) according to the number of pulses per turn indicated by the encoder manufacturer.

V0.01 – 04/2013

V0.01

04/2013

30

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

6.1.2. Low cost encoder (asynchronous motors only) 3VFMAC-DSP 6P frequency inverter is provided with a connector (XC3) to allow using a low cost encoder. It is recommended to use this encoder type whenever the coupling of an industrial encoder to the machine is not possible and whenever the functioning in open-loop mode is not able to meet all the wanted expectations. Its use shall be limited to situations when the adaptation of a digital encoder to the machine is absolutely impossible. Due to its low resolution, the obtained comfort rate will always be well below the comfort degree provided by an industrial encoder. The connector C3 includes the following connections: 20: positive terminal of encoder power supply (+10 Vdc). 21: negative terminal of encoder power supply (0 Vdc). 22: Reading of pulses, channel 1. The encoder maximum consumption will be 40 mA. The encoder must be provided with open-collector outputs. The low cost encoder consists of magnets (8, 10 or 12) located on the machine handwheel (or equivalent part), equidistantly placed and with alternating polarities. A sensor (supplied with the equipment) will be placed in such a way its active front face (marked with a white point) is fully facing the magnets. The maximum distance between the white point and the magnets will be 2 mm.

FIGURE 6.2

Together with the sensor and magnets, a string and some metal profiles are supplied. The string enables placing the magnets in a quick and easy way. Place (usually) 12 magnets: 1. Embrace the handwheel with the string and make a knot so that the string keeps the handwheel perimeter size. 2. Take out the string, stretch it and mark the end. Now the handwheel is divided into 2 parts. Fold the marked end upon the knot; mark the 2 new ends of string and now the handwheel is divided into 4 parts. 3. Place back the string embracing the handwheel. Marks on the string indicate the first 4 division points of the handwheel. 4. By using the string, subdivide each quarter of the handwheel until all the points are achieved. 5. Fix the magnets with high-tack glue (Loctite or similar). Ensure their perfect fixing.

V0.01

04/2013

31

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

FIGURE 6.3

VERY IMPORTANT: the positioning of the magnets is very important. They must be perfectly equidistant.

VERY IMPORTANT: The polarity of the magnets must be alternate. In order to confirm the correct positioning, connect the equipment to the encoder (paying attention to the numbering) and turn on the power on the frequency converter only (not on the control board). By hand, make the motor move. Each time a magnet faces the sensor, the LED must change its state.  Regarding to the converter configuration, configuration, in order to get a proper operation, we must: 1. Check that the machine number of poles is correct (parameter DRI.03). 2. Set the value of parameter ENC.00 (encoder number of pulses) like the number of placed magnets divided by two, as each couple of magnets generates one pulse. Therefore, if the numbers of permitted magnets are 8, 10 and 12, the values of ENC.00 associated to each of them are 4, 5 and 6, respectively.

6.1.3. Absolute/sinusoidal encoder (synchronous motors only) 3VFMAC-DSP 6P frequency converter is provided with four connectors (XC6, XC8, XC7 and XC5) to allow using an absolute/sinusoidal encoder. It is IMPERATIVE and MANDATORY to use it for the control of synchronous machines . It will be placed in the motor and it will enable the equipment to know in real time the rotation speed and the rotor exact position, which are necessary conditions for the control of this type of machines. Even though it is a single physical device, actually, this encoder type consists of two different encoders: the absolute encoder and the sinusoidal encoder. It must be supplied together with the machine, and its features are: - Power supply: 5 Vdc. - Sinusoidal encoder: two differential sinusoidal channels, 1Vpp geometrically displaced in 90º. 2048 cycles per turn recommended, and the valid values are 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096. - Absolute encoder: Protocol Endat01®  (proprietary protocol Heidenhain). It consists of two differential channels of data and clock, with 8192 positions for a complete turn.  

V0.01

04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

32

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter In the following table, you will get the description of connectors XC6, XC8, XC5 and XC7 related to the sinusoidal/absolute encoder connection:

ENCODER

CONNECTOR

TERMINAL 1

XC6

Sinusoidal

XC8

XC5

Absolute XC7

2 3 4 5 6 7 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 T1 T2 T3 T4 TABLE 6.1

DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Now, NOT USED In the past, SHIELD NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED Channel A+ Channel AChannel B+ Channel BNOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED DATADATA+ CLOCKCLOCK+

The sinusoidal/absolute encoder connection to 3VFMAC-DSP 6P is made through an adaptor cable supplied by MP.

PICTURE 6.2 As shown in the picture, the cable is provided with a female connector DB15 at one end which will be connected to the male connector DB15 of the machine encoder. The other end is provided with 2 Wago seven-pole connectors (XC6 and XC8), 2 two-pole Wago connectors (XC5 and XC7) and 1 three-pole Wago connector (power supply, with two terminals +,- only). This adaptor cable will be integrated in controllers supplied by MP. In the first controllers for controlling synchronous machines, the encoder shield was connected to terminal 1 of the connector XC6. Now, the shield connection to this terminal has been removed. Approximately 1 cm of the adaptor shield is bare to be fixed with screw/washer to bottom plate of the cabinet. To ensure the proper motion of the car, we must check the absolute encoder and sinusoidal encoder; it is mandatory to make following operations in the specified order: 1. Confirm the values of following parameters: ENC.00: We must set ENC.00 to the number of pulses per turn of the encoder coupled to the motor. It is very important to be sure about this value. A mistaken value at this parameter may cause an overspeed and/or an erratic behaviour. ENC.01: 21

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

33

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter TR1.00:  On the machine’s nameplate, the electric nominal frequency (Fn) is indicated. This is the maximum value to be set to this parameter. TR1.01: It has to be set about 10% of TR1.00, and with margins from 5% up to 15%. TR0.00: The inspection speed value has to be set at 30% of the rated speed (TR1.00). DRI.03: Check that the value of number of pole of this parameter corresponds to the value shown on the machine’s nameplate. If it not shown, it could be obtained from the following formula: 120xFrequency RPM

 

VEL.10: 11000 DRI.07: Refer to the machine’s nameplate to set the value shown there (In). INT.03, INT.05, INT.04, INT.06:  Depending on the machine brand/model. If they are not available, contact with MP. 2. With the inverter in RUN mode, at idle state, if the inverter display shows Err05, it means there is a problem with the sinusoidal encoder. We will have to make following checks: - Check if the main board is switched on. - Press the red button (P/R) on the inverter. - If the error persists, we must make following checks: a) Check the encoder power supply (5 Vdc). b) Check that the negative terminal of the power source is connected to ground. c) Check the proper connection of terminals XC6 and XC8. d) Check that the adaptor cable wires coming out from connectors XC6 and XC8 are not  “bitten” in in plastic. e) Check that the length of the cable between the machine encoder up to the adaptor cable is about 10 m. f) Check the continuity of all and each pin of the adaptor cable connector DB15 in regard with the terminals of Wago connectors, as shown in following table:

DB15 FEMALE INVERTER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 HOUSING

XC5/T2 XC5/T1 NC POSITIVE (5V) NEGATIVE (GND) NC XC8/41 NC XC7/T3 XC7/T4 NC XC6/6 XC6/7 XC8/42 NC In the past, XC6/1 Now, ground (cabinet rear plate) TABLE 6.2

V0.01 – 04/2013

34

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter After making all these checks, press the inverter red button (PR). If error 05 still persists, contact MP Lifts staff. 3. Set the control board in inspection mode or in MES mode. 4. Move the lift upwards or downwards. If err51 appears when starting, we must make following checks: a) Check the proper connection of connectors XC5 and XC7 to the inverter. b) Check that the Wago connectors do not bite the plastic. c) Check the proper connection of the adaptor cable to the terminal DB15 of the encoder cable. d) Check one by one the electrical continuity of the adapter cable wires, according to previous table (TABLE 6.1.2). e) Check that the encoder supports the Endat protocol, as shown in here below picture.

PICTURE 6.3

If error 05 still persists, contact MP Lifts staff .  5. At this point, we must check the motion direction. Let us remind that the control board is in Inspection mode or in MES mode. After checking that point, press the upwards (or downwards) button. If the lift moves downwards (or upwards), i.e., it travels in the opposite direction of the commanded one, we must modify parameter CNF.05: If CNF.05 = 1, set CNF.05 = 0 If CNF.05 = 0, set CNF.05 = 1 Try again to press the upwards (or downwards) button and verify the proper motion direction.

VERY IMPORTANT: WITH SYNCRHONOUS MACHINES, TO MODIFY THE MOTION DIRECTION, NEVER, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, CHANGE THE ORDER OF THE OUPUT PHASES TO THE MOTOR , as done with asynchronous machines.  machines. 

V0.01 – 04/2013

35

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

6.2. Weighing control: VK2P (asynchronous only) 6.2.1. Description This feature is available for asynchronous motors only. This performance is an optional feature. This system enables 3VFMAC-DSP 6P, by incorporating a weighing reader (VK2P), to adjust the required motor torque to carry out a service independently from the load in car. The main aim of using the VK2P is to avoid the roll-back effect when starting and it is particularly suitable for lowinertia machines. The user shall indicate the car maximum load Q (parameter PSO.00), as well as the maximum torque that the system will apply in order to correct the load in car (parameter PSO.01). This feature will be operative only if the equipment is configured in close-loop mode with industrial encoder.

6.2.2. Requirements 1. Weighing reader VK2P with bedframe/car (model TCE) load cells and a proper calibration. 2. Communication between both systems. The communication between 3VFMAC-DSP 6P and VK2P is of RS485 type and it is carried out between terminals T1 and T2 of connector XC5 and terminals T1 and T2 of VK2P, respectively. 3. Operation mode 3VFMAC-DSP 6P CLOSED-LOOP with industrial encoder (CNF.00 = 1, ENC.00 ≥ 500 and ENC.00 ≤ 5000).

6.2.3. Parameterisation For the activation/deactivation of this feature, there is no parameter. As a matter of fact, whenever 3VFMAC-DSP 6P is connected to a VK2P, this feature is activated. But in the group PSO, there are parameters dedicated to the weighing control configuration: PSO.00: Maximum load in car in kilograms. Range from 200 up to 3000. Default value depending on model:   10 HP: 450 Kg; 15 HP: 630 Kg; 20 HP: 900 Kg. PSO.01: Torque percentage in regard with the rated torque to be applied for the maximum load. Range from 0 up to 50. Default value: 0. As mentioned in previous section “Requirements”, this feature will be operative if 3VFMAC-DSP 6P is configured in closed-loop mode with industrial encoder. Therefore, CNF.00: Maximum load in car in kilograms. Range from 200 up to 3000. ENC.00: Number of pulses per encoder turn. Range: 500…5000. Default value: 2000.

6.2.4. Viewing There is only one viewing for this weighing control feature monitoring (refer to chapter 7): Weight. The possible values of this viewing are:

Value in kilograms registered kilograms registered by VK2P, positive or negative, depending on the car situation and its load. Or, “PSoEr” , if there is a connection problem or if VK2P is not connected to 3VFMAC-DSP 6P.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

36

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 7. Monitoring 7.1. General 3VFMAC-DSP 6P enables the enables the viewing in real time of the most relevant electric, dynamic and control magnitudes: current consumption of the motor, speed, target speed, voltage of capacitors, encoder reading of pulses, etc. The monitoring and viewing of these magnitudes are available in RUN mode only, both in idle state or running. The viewing main aim of these magnitudes is to enable checking the proper functioning of the encoder and installation as well. Therefore, these viewings can and should be used as a tool for detection, debugging and solving problems that may affect the inverter.

7.2. Console handling Let us remind that the console or user interface of 3VFMAC-DSP 6P consists of five 7 segment- displays and four buttons which are set out as shown in the following figure:

FIGURE 7.1 The actions associated to each button in monitoring mode are shown in the following table:

BUTTON

ACTION If the inverter is in RUN mode and in idle state (without providing energy), change it to SETUP mode. When a service is running, pressing this button does not produce any effect.

It changes to the next viewing. For two seconds it will display the value legend and, after, it will display the magnitude value. If the active magnitude is the last one, it will change to the first one. 

It changes to the previous viewing. For two seconds it will display the value legend and, after, it will display the magnitude value. If the active magnitude is the first one, it will change to the last one.  

It displays the magnitude legend that is being visualised for two seconds. After, it displays again the value.

TABLE 7.1

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

37

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter There are two special viewings that are exceptions to the above: a) a)   Main viewing. viewing. According to regulations in force, the inverter must inform whether the lift is moving upwards or downwards and, also, if there is a speed deviation in regard with the target speed. DIRECTION

SPEED

D1 D2 STOPPED 

-

-

D4

D5

O

U

10% SPEED DEVIATION. BLINKING.

D3 GOING DOWN 

d

n

GOING UP 

U

P

-   -

 

OTHERWISE

  FIGURE 7.2 When another viewing is selected and the console is not touched for 3 minutes, the inverter will automatically change to this viewing mode. This viewing special feature is that it does not have any associated legend. Therefore, when the button   is pressed, there is no effect and when this viewing is selected, no text appears. b) Viewing of errors. errors. The present software versions, both for synchronous and asynchronous, record the last 32 errors. These errors can be visualised on the console, organised from the most recent to the oldest. When from the previous or next viewing we change to this one, the legend UErr appears   This viewing special feature is that, when the button   is pressed,  we change to the next oldest error and we will .

never be able to see again the text UErr   .

The console functioning in monitoring mode is summarized in the following diagram.

First/Main viewing

Viewing 1

Viewing 2

Viewing 3

-

.

.

Viewing 4

Last Viewing .

.

.

Error Viewing

FIGURE 7.3

 

V0.01 – 04/2013

38

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter As noteworthy and common aspects for synchronous and asynchronous viewings, let us say that: a) The main viewing is always the first. In addition, if no button of the console is touched for three minutes 3VFMAC-DSP 6P will set the main viewing as the active one. b) At any moment, we can know the displayed magnitude by pressing the button , except when displaying the main viewing and the error viewing. c) We can move forwards and backwards along the displayed magnitudes with the buttons  and ⊳, respectively. Furthermore, when we are on the first viewing, the previous one is the last one and when we are on the last viewing, the next one is the first one.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

39

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 7.3. Asynchronous version monitoring POSITION 

VIEWING 

GENERAL DESCRIPTION  1) Two first digits: Indicate the motion direction 2) Two last digits: Indicate speed deviation above 10%.

STATE  0

Main viewing

D1

D2

Stopped

-

Upward Downward Speed deviation ≤ 10% Speed deviation > 10%

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Frec Encod int s int r Ad in tens Uerr int d int u UEL rEU EiUEL EPUEL An

15

Udd

16

Uud

17 18 19 20 21 22 23

UdE UuE SEno CoSE iurEF USlip UrEF

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

PEso Uer SEriE nboot E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13

41

E14

42

E15

43 44

E16 E17

D3

D4

D5

-

-

-

u

p

N/A

N/A

d

n

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

-

-

N/A

N/A

O

U

Target Frequency (Hz) Encoder pulses V-phase current (digital units) U-phase current (digital units) Effective current or output to motor rms (Amperes) Bus voltage (Dc volts) Last 32 errors’ viewing Measured Magnetizing Current (Amperes) Measured Torque Current (Amperes) Measured speed (electric Hz) Measured speed (r.p.m.) Speed control Integral Term error (digital units) Speed control Proportional Term error (digital units) Electrical angle Voltage vector Magnetisation Component of the output to motor (digital units) Voltage vector Torque Component of the output to motor (digital units) Voltage vector X-Component of the output to motor (digital units) Voltage vector Y-Component of the output to motor (digital units) Electrical angle sine (digital units) Electrical angle cosine (digital units) Reference torque current (digital units) Sliding (digital units) Reference mechanical speed (digital units) Weight (Kg.), if VK2P connected Software version Equipment serial number Number of inverter start-ups Sliding stated in electrical hertz Voltage applied on the motor (V) Reference mechanical speed in Hz*128 Control Output Iq with filtered speed Electrical frequency Speed control proportional constant Speed control integral constant Weight offset Interpretation of Parameter VEL.10 Maximum torque current (digital units) Effective current minimum value in an electric cycle (digital units) Reference magnetizing current Operation command Electrical frequency offset 1 at a stop due to torque compensation (Hz*100) Approach speed 1 calculated according to torque compensation (Hz*100) Sinusoidal curve time (ms) Machine control variable for torque compensation states TABLE 7.2

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

40

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 7.4. Synchronous version monitoring Due to the higher number of control variables in synchronous machines, viewings have been structured in blocks. On one hand, there is a main block that will always be visible and displays the basic viewing magnitudes. On the other hand, there is a group of 4 blocks that can be visible by using parameter CNF.06: CNF.06

Data Block 1 Display Setting

Data Block 1 Display Setting

Not used Not used Not used

 

FIGURE 7.4

If the digit associated to each block is equal to 1, the block will be displayed. Otherwise, it will be hidden. The key associated to the viewings of these additional blocks will include the block number and the position of the digit within the block. For example, viewing 3 of block 2 would be represented as follows:

B

1

2  0 .

3

FIGURE 7.5

Please remember that block 0 or main block will ALWAYS be visible.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

41

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 7.4.1. Block 0: main block POSITION 

VIEWING 

GENERAL DESCRIPTION  1) Two first digits: Indicate motion direction 2) Two last digits: In normal or automatic rescue operation with batteries, indicate deviation above 10% of speed. In the case of rescue operation without batteries, if the acceleration ramp is being used (balance situation), indicate, as in the previous case, deviation above 10% of the speed. If it shifts to unbalance mode (unbalance situation), the letters dC will flash.

STATE  0

Main viewing

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

Stopped

-

-

-

-

Upward

u

p

N/A

N/A

Downward

d

n

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

-

-

N/A

N/A

O

U

N/A

N/A

Speed

deviation

≤ 10% Speed

deviation

> 10% Unbalanced

load

rescue

d

1

Frec

Target Frequency (Hz)

2

FOut

Output electrical frequency (Hz)

3

rEU

Measured speed (r.p.m.)

4

Ad in

Effective current or output to motor rms (Amperes)

5

tens

Bus voltage (Vdc)

6

int d

Measured Magnetisation current (Amperes)

7

int u

Measured Torque Current (Amperes)

8

Uerr

Last 32 errors’ viewing

9

Pabs

Last absolute position reading

10

nboot

Number of inverter start-ups.

11

Uer

Software version TABLE 7.3

C

V0.01 – 04/2013

42

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 7.4.2. Block 1: sinusoidal and absolute encoder POSITION 

GENERAL DESCRIPTION 

0

Last absolute position reading

1

Sinusoidal encoder channel A reading

2

Sinusoidal encoder channel B reading

3

Minimum sinusoidal encoder channel A current cycle.

4

Minimum sinusoidal encoder channel A current cycle.

5

Minimum sinusoidal encoder channel B current cycle.

6

Minimum sinusoidal encoder channel B current cycle.

7

Position relating to the sinusoidal encoder’s current cycle

8

Cycles

9

Turn

10

Electrical angle

11

Minimum value average of sinusoidal encoder channel A

12

Maximum value average of sinusoidal encoder channel A

13

Minimum value average of sinusoidal encoder channel B

14

Maximum value average of sinusoidal encoder channel B

15

Sinusoidal encoder channel A zero

16

Sinusoidal encoder channel B zero

17

Sinusoidal encoder amplitude adjustment

TABLE 7.4

7.4.3. Block 2: current data POSITION 

GENERAL DESCRIPTION 

0

V-phase current (digital units)

1

U-phase current (digital units)

2

Electrical Angle (digital units) TABLE 7.5

V0.01 – 04/2013

43

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 8. PARAMETERS 8.1. General The inverter parameters have been structured in pages or groups. Each page can contain up to 16 parameters and is identified with an acronym of three letters. Each parameter is identified by the group acronym to which it belongs and a 2-digit number, with a value from 0 to 15 that determines its position or order into the page. For instance: the acronym “CNF” has been assigned to the page “General configuration” . This page first parameter is “Type of Control” and the second one, “Type of inverter”. The way of appointing each parameter will be CNF.00 and CNF.01 respectively. Whenever we enter the programming mode, we must give an access code. The access level of each parameter is determined by this key and, in some case, by the value of other parameters. There are three access codes: Normal, Advanced and Default. On the other hand, there are three access levels per each parameter: Reading/Writing, Reading only and Not visible. In the tables of this chapter, each parameter access level corresponding to each access code will be determined. Example 1: 1: To modify any VEL group parameter, the access to programming mode with advanced key is required. Otherwise, it will appear as “Reading only”. Example 2: 2: The VEL group parameters will be visible only if the parameter CNF.00 = 1, i.e., if the inverter has been configured in closed-loop mode. The parameters can be adjusted from the inverter console itself or by using the PC program MPConfig (refer to chapter 13, section 13.1).

8.2. Console handling in programming mode Let us remind that the console or user interface of 3VFMAC-DSP 6P consists of five 7 segment- displays and four buttons which are set out as shown in the following figure:

The action or actions assigned to each button depend on the context or level in which we are at each moment. The way to know in which level or context we are at each moment is the information shown on the displays.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

44

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter For the console handling in programming mode, four levels described in the here below table have been defined:

LEVEL/CONTEXT Access code editing

BUTTON

ACTION

P/R

Accept the key



Select the next digit to the active one Select the previous digit to the active one Increase the digit value

⊳

DESCRIPTION 1. To change from RUN mode to SETUP or PROGRAM mode, press the button P/R. 2. The blinking digit is the active one at each time. 3. The leftmost digit before the point is the access level digit: 0: Normal access level 1: Advanced access level 2: Default level. Reserved. 3. The key associated to the selected access level has to be entered in the other four digits. Each digit value is 0..9, A..F.



4. To accept the entered key, press the button P/R. If it is the right key, “SETUP” will blink, and after that we will change to the group level. Otherwise, we will remain on access code editing mode.

Groups or pages

Parameters (into a page)

Parameter editing

P/R

Exit the PROGRAMMING or SETUP mode.



Select next group.

⊳

Select previous group.



Change to parameter level, i.e., the parameters of the selected group are displayed.

P/R  ⊳ 

P/R  ⊳

Change back to group level. Select the next parameter. Select the previous parameter. Change to editing mode of parameters. Accept the edited value 1. The blinking digit is the active one at each as the new parameter. time. Select the next digit to 2. The permitted values for each digit are 0..9. the active one. Select the previous to the active one. digit Increase the digit value.

3. To accept the entered value, press the button P/R. If it is the right value, “Po” will blink, and after that we will change back to the level of parameters.



Otherwise, “PErr” will blink, the previous value will be restored and we will remain on editing mode of parameters.

TABLE 8.1

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

45

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter Here after, we show in a schematic way the global functioning of the console in terms of programming: 1. ENTRY IN SETUP

 

P/R

P/R

P/R

 

1s

P/R

3. Parameter level within a page ...

.. . 4. Parameter Editing Level P/R

1s

  SCHEME 8.1

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

46

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 8.3. Parameters of asynchronous version This table of parameters is valid from version 911A. It applies to asynchronous machines only. As already mentioned in previous section 8.1, the access level of each parameter is mainly determined by the access code to the programming mode. In the here below table, there are two columns under the heading access code:

N: Normal access level A: Advanced access level The permissions for each parameter are given in accordance with the access code:

RW: Reading /Writing RO: Reading only H: Hidden PAGE/ GROUP 

PARAM

DESCRIPTION 

ACCESS LEVEL  N A

DESCRIPTION OF VALUES 

CNF.00

Type of Control 

RW

RW

This parameter will determine whether it operates in open or closed loop. 

CNF.01

Type of inverter 

RO

RO

Model of inverter concerning feeding and power. 

DEFAULT VALUE

RANGE  0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 6:

Open loop Closed loop 10 HP/400 Vac 10 HP/220 Vac 15 HP/400 Vac 20 HP/400 Vac

1 According model

to

Digit 1 (from right) Maximum no. of errors that may occur in 3 minutes. After this period, the inverter is locked until one of the following operations is carried out:  - Cut off power - Activate terminal 19 - Enter programming

CNF.02

Autoreset 

RW

RW

Digit 2 (from right) It sets up the phases unbalance error detection (err12). The inverter uses two independent algorithms, the standard one and the strict one, to detect it: 0: Activation of both algorithms: standard and strict. 1: Standard activated and strict deactivated. 2: Standard deactivated and strict activated. 3: Both of them deactivated (not recommended).

Digit 1: 0..5 Digit 2: 0..3 Digit 3: 0,1

5

Digit 4: 0,1 Digit 5: 0

Digit 3 (from right): Contactors state check setup while inverter is stopped.

CNF General Configuration 

0: Enabled 1: Disabled Digit 4 (from right): Current sensors check setup.

CNF.03

Source of commands 

CNF.04

CNF.07 CNF.08 CNF.09

TR0 Travelling. General Parameters 

the

0: Enabled 1: Disabled Specifies whether the commands will be given through the terminals or CAN. 

RW

RW

CAN Monitor 

RW

RW

Specifies whether you wish to activate the CAN monitoring or not and, if yes, yo u determine which one. 

Default Test Mode  Parameter access client code  Parameter access client code 

RO

RO

Reserved 

RW

H

RW

H

In both cases, it specifies the client code to access the parameters. It is done this way so that no value that may prevent parameterising is entered accidentally. 

0: Terminals 1: CAN 0: Deactivated 1: Current Interface 2: Voltage Interface  Reserved 

0

0

0

0...9999

0

0...9999

0

0...65535

Number at the lower right corner. ADA-NNNNN 

CNF.10

Serial Number

RO

RO

Informs of the equipment’s serial number. This value is unique for each equipment. 

CNF.11

Software Version

RO

RO

Informs of the software version engraved on the equipment. 

Not applicable 

911 

TR0.00

Inspection Speed

RW

RW

Inspection operation speed (maintenance). 

5.00...65.00 Hz

15.00 Hz

Output electrical frequency (open-loop) or motor rotation speed (closed-loop mode) that, when exceeded, switches the KRL1 relay. At (0Hz), RL1 is not activated (terminals 30 _ 31 and 32). TR0.01

Speed Limit

RW

RW IMPORTANT THE VALUE OF THIS PARAMETER MUST BE 0.00 IF A3  AMENDMENT IS ENABLED (A3A.00=1 or 2)  2) 

0.00,0.25...45.00 Hz

0.00 Hz

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

47

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter PAGE/ GROUP 

PARAM

TR0.02

ACCESS LEVEL  N A

DESCRIPTION 

Speed limit relay logic

RW

RW

DESCRIPTION OF VALUES  Allows configuring the speed limit relay logic. With positive logic (1), the relay will turn ON when the speed is above the pre-set limit, and OFF when below. With negative logic (0), the relay will turn ON when the speed is below the pre-set limit or stopped, and OFF when above the limit. Speed is understood as output electrical Frequency in open-loop mode or motor rotation speed in closed-loop mode.

DEFAULT VALUE

RANGE 

0: Negative logic 1: Positive logic 

1

Rated speed 1  Approach speed 1  Acceleration ramp time  The higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end. Only operative in Sinusoidal curve (RSN.00 = 2).   Value 1 = neutral Deceleration ramp 1 time  The higher the value, the gentler the beginning of the curve and less gentle at the end. Value 1 = neutral

10.00...65.00 Hz 01.00...15.00 Hz 00.30...10.00 s

50.00 Hz 05.00 Hz 02.50 s

0.10...15.00

1.50

00.30...10.00 s

02.20 s

0.10...15.00

1.00

Rated speed 2  Approach speed 2  Acceleration ramp 2 time  The higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end. Value 1 = neutral Deceleration ramp 2 time  The higher the value, the gentler the beginning of the curve and less gentle at the end. Value 1 = neutral

10.00...65.00 Hz 01.00...15.00 Hz 00.30...10.00 s

30.00 Hz 05.00 Hz 01.00 s

0.10...15.00

1.00

00.30...10.00 s

01.50 s

0.10...15.00

1.00

S-type Curve 

0: Standard 2: Sinusoidal 

2

1...999

50

1...999

50

1...999

10

1...999

50

IMPORTANT THIS PARAMETER APPLIES IF PARAMETER A3A.00 IS SET TO 0 (A3 AMENDMENT DISABLED).  

TR1 Travelling

TR1.00 TR1.01 TR1.02

Rated speed Approach speed Acceleration time 

RW RW RW

RW RW RW

TR1.03

Modification Factor for Acceleration curve

RW

RW

Deceleration time Modification Factor for Deceleration curve

RW

RW

RW

RW

Rated Speed Approach speed Acceleration time  Modification Factor for Acceleration curve Deceleration time Modification Factor for Deceleration curve

RW RW RW

RW RW RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RSN.00

S-type Curve 

RW

RW

RSN.01

Acceleration Initial K 

RW

RW

RSN.02

Acceleration End K  RW

RW

TR1.04 TR1.05

TR2.00 TR2.01 TR2.02 TR2 Travelling Unit 2

TR2.03 TR2.04 TR2.05

RSN Normal S-Curves

RSN.03 RSN.04 RSN.05 RSN.06

RSC Short S-ramp

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

Time in milli milliseconds seconds of the stopping curve 

1...3000

0.800

RW

RW

Levelling adjustment by load compensation 

0..200

100

0...6000

0.000

0...100

50

RSC.00

Extension time in short floor 

RW

RW

RSC.01

Target increase percentage 

RW

RW

RW

RW

Delay between brake activation command and start of motor spinning. 

00.01...02.50 s

00.30 s

RW

RW

Time elapsed between speed 0 and brake deactivation. 

00.01...02.50 s

00.20 s

RW

RW

Time elapsed between brake deactivation and motor power failure at a stop;  

00.01...02.50 s

00.50 s

RO

RO

Stated in seconds. 

00.01...01.00 s

00.15 s

STC.00 STC.01 STC.02 STC.03

STC Start/Stop Control  

Deceleration beginning K  Deceleration End K  Stopping curve time Levelling adjustment

Gentleness at the beginning of the acceleration ramp. Higher number: Greater gentleness  Gentleness at the end of the acceleration ramp. Higher number: Greater gentleness  Gentleness at the beginning of the deceleration ramp. Higher number: Greater gentleness  Gentleness at the end of the deceleration ramp. Higher number: Greater gentleness 

Pre-start brake delay  Brake prior to stop delay  Brake after stop delay  Waiting time of contactor switching at start 

Stated in milliseconds; in short floor: It is the time the speed maintains at which a gear is changed.  Stated in %. The higher it is the gentler speed rectification in short floor (thus reducing the approach section). 

Digits 1,2: 00...99 cHz STC.04

Speed hysteresis at stopping 

RO

RW

Digits 1, 2 (from right): Upper limit  Digits 3, 4 (from right): Lower limit 

Digits 3,4: 00...99 cHz

00.10

Digit 5: 0 STC.05 STC.06

STC.07

PSO PSO.00 Weight control  

Current value close to 0  Maximum time allowed for a current drop  Additional time for residual current to be equal to zero 

Car Maximum Load 

H

RO

Stated in digital units 

1...33

5

H

RO

Stated in seconds. 

00.01...02.50 s

1.00 s

H

RO

Stated in seconds. 

00.01...02.50 s

0.02 s

50...3000 Kg

10 HP: 450 Kg 15 HP: 630 Kg 20 HP: 900 Kg

RW

RW

Car maximum load in kilograms. Only operative when the weight control function is available 

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

48

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter PAGE/ GROUP 

ENC Encoder

PARAM

DESCRIPTION 

Additional torque expressed as a ratio (%) of the rated torque applied to the maximum load. Only operative when the weight control function is available 

0 – 50

0

Number of pulses/turn 

RW

RW

Number of pulses per encoder turn 

4..8, 500...5000

2000

Type of Motor 

RO

RO 

Determines whether asynchronous. 

RW

RW

RW RW

ENC.00

DRI.00

DRI.03

DEFAULT VALUE

RANGE 

RW

Additional % 

DRI.02

DESCRIPTION OF VALUES 

RW

PSO.01

DRI.01 

ACCESS LEVEL  N A

torque

Constant of rotor time as motor  Constant of rotor time as generator  Number of poles 

the

motor

is

synchronous

or

0: Asynchronous or induction 

0

Constant of rotor time when opera ting as motor. 

10.0 – 1000.0 ms

90.0 ms

RW

Constant of rotor time when operating as generator.  

10.0 – 1000.0 ms

90.0 ms

RW

Number of motor poles. NOT THE NUMBER OF POLE PAIRS. 

2...50, Number

4

 

Even

 

10/400: 17.8 A DRI Machine Data  DRI.07

Motor rated current

RW

RW

This parameter specifies the rated current of the machine’s nameplate. 

10/220: 35.5 A 2.0..35.5 A 15/400: 26.7 A 20/400: 31.8 A

DRI.08

Motor Model

RO

RW

Specifies the motor model. On doing it, no-load current, rotor time constants and number of pole pairs associated to the machine are determined. 

0, machine table codes (1) 

0

See Machine Table below. 10/400: 10.0 A

INT.00

No-load current (Id)

RW

RW

Corresponds to the motor’s no-load current. Normally, do not modify default value. 

10/220: 15.0 A 2.0..24.0 A 15/400: 12.0 A 20/400: 14.0 A 10/400: 10.0 A

INT.01

Starting current

RW

RW

Gradually operation (including Only valid

increase it until obtaining the correct of the lift in all the loading situations the maximum one). DO NOT EXCEED IT.   in open-loop control.

2.0..24.0 A

0/220: 15.0 A 15/400: 12.0 A

INT Current Control

20/400: 14.0 A  A  The gradient between the speed control output Iq and the control system Iq is: INT.02

Torque (Iq) Filter

RO

RW

0...10

5

(Speed control Iq – Control system Iq) 2(INT.01) INT.03

INT.04

INT.05

INT.06

INT.07

VEL.00 VEL.01

VEL.02

VEL Speed Control VEL.03

VEL.04

Id Current Control Proportional Constant Id Current Control Integral Constant Iq Current Control Proportional Constant Iq Current Control Integral Constant Over-magnetizing current Starting Prop Constant Rated Speed Proportional Constant Rated Speed Integral Constant Approach Speed Control Proportional Constant Approach Speed Control Integral Constant

RO

RW

Stated in digital units 

1...2048

250

RO

RO

Stated in digital units 

0...512

1

RO

RW

Stated in digital units 

1...2048

250

RO

RO

Stated in digital units 

0...512

1

RO

RW

At rated speed, no-load current applied is INT.00. At speed 0, INT.00 + (INT.00 x INT.06) / 100. NOT VALID IN OPEN-LOOP. 

0...50

0

RW

RW

Stated in digital units 

1...64000

4000

RW

RW

Stated in digital units 

1...64000

4000

RW

RW

Stated in digital units 

0...1024

20

RW

RW

Stated in digital units 

1...64000

4000

RW

RW

Stated in digital units 

0...1024

20

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

49

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter PAGE/ GROUP 

PARAM

VEL.05

VEL.06

ACCESS LEVEL  N A

DESCRIPTION  Control Integral Constant of Speed during Stopping Curve

RW

RW

DESCRIPTION OF VALUES 

DEFAULT VALUE

RANGE 

Stated in digital units 

0...1024

15

0...10

3

0...3.000

0.512

0...3.000

0.512

0 or 1 every digit Digits 1, 2, 3, 4: 0,1

1000

Reserved The gradient between the motor’s measured W and the W used in speed control and frequency generation is:

VEL.07

VEL.08

Motor’s measured speed filter

RO

RW

Time for speed stability criterion

RO

RW

(Motor’s W measured – W control) 2(VEL.06) Stated in milliseconds. Once stability has been reached, the integral term is applicable. At approach speed, applicable if the digit 0 of VEL.10 is set to 0. Stated in milliseconds. Only operative when bit 1 of VEL.10 is set at 1.   If the digit 1 (from right) is set to 1, an Id, Iq, We constant control will be carried out in approach. Set to the value 0.   

VEL.09

VEL.10

Stability time Approach  

in

Speed control 

RO

RW

If the digit 2 (from right) is set to 1, an Id, Iq, We constant control will be carried out at a stop. Set to the value 0 (activate with low inertia machine).  RO

RW - If the digit 3 (from right) is set to 1, speed control will only operate when a new speed has been detected. If set to 0, it always operates.

Digit 5 : 0 

- If digit 4 (from right) is set to 1, “overboost” function will be activated. If set to 0, it deactivates. It only applies in closed loops with low cost encoder (magnets). 

PEC Power Electronic Inverter

 

ADJ

Channel adjustment 

 

 

RES

PEC.00

Switching frequency 

RW

RW

05.500 KHz

5.5 – 20.0 KHz

15.0 KHz

PEC.01

Type of modulation 

RW

RW

Type of modulation 

0

PEC.02

Dead-time 

H

RO

Value in microseconds 

PEC.03

Minimum pulse width 

H

RO

Value in microseconds 

0:PWM Triangular 1:Space Vector 00.500..03.000 µs 00.000..03.000 µs

ADJ.00

Ir read gain 

RO

RO

Stated in digital units

0...65535

ADJ.01

Is read gain 

RO

RO

Stated in digital units

0...65535

ADJ.02

Vdc1 read gain 

RO

RO

Stated in digital units

0...65535

0

00.000 µs

RES.00

Rescue Mode 

RW

RW

Specifies the activation/deactivation and configuration of the rescue mode. 

0: Disabled 1: Enabled, WITHOUT detection of favourable direction Enabled, WITH detection of favourable direction 

RES.01

Speed in mode 

RW

RW

Specifies the speed in rescue mode 

0.10..15.00 Hz

5.00 Hz

RES.02

Starting voltage 

RW

RW

Specifies the percentage of bus voltage at staring 

2.0-90.0%

60%

TST.00

Test mode 

RW

RW

Specifies whether the test mode is activated or not. 

0: NO 1: YES

0

Rescue

 

00.500 µs

rescue

TST

Test   Test

It is used to adjust the current sensors’ amplitude with an error below 1% with reference to the output rated current. The adjustment must be carried out as follows: 1) Set the control board either in inspection or MES mode. 2) Set TUN.01 = 1

 

TUN

 Adjustments

 

TUN.01

Current sensors’ adjustment 

RW

RW

3) After quitting SETUP, AdJin St Art will flash. 4) Keep the up or down button pressed down until AdJin End appears on the display. During the process, AdJ01, AdJ02, etc. will appear. IMPORTANT NOTE:  NOTE:  During the process, the lift does NOT move and the brake is NOT activated. As a result, the button pressed (up or down) does not matter, NO car/counterweight has to be hung, nor any other operation must be carried out in the installation. 

0: Deactivated 1: Activated

 

0

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

50

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter PAGE/ GROUP 

 

A3A

 A3

 Amendment

PARAM

DESCRIPTION 

ACCESS LEVEL  N A

A3A.00

A3 amendment activation 

A3A.01

Time of interlocking 

RW

RW

A3A.02

Time of release 

RW

RW

RW

RW

DESCRIPTION OF VALUES 

DEFAULT VALUE

RANGE 

This parameter specifies whether the function associated to A3 amendment is activated.  Delay between uncontrolled contactor opening and interlocking activation. Maximum waiting time for the activation of release output.

0: Deactivated 1: Activated, automatic reset 2: Activated, manual reset

1

1.00..10.00 s

4.00 s

0.10..2.50 s

1.20 s

 

TABLE 8.2 (1) The parameter DRI.08 (code of motor model) is a fictitious parameter. When entering the motor code, the parameters of no load current (INT.00), number of poles (DRI.03) and machine constants (DRI.01, DRI.02) are set. However, their values do not remain. For instance: instance: We edit the parameter DRI.08 and enter the value 204. In so doing, the console display will l show  “Po” blinking, blinking, i.e. the entered entered value is rig right. ht. The paramete parameters rs DRI.01, DRI.01, DRI.02, D DRI.03 RI.03 an and d INT.00 hav have e been set to 88.5, 88.5, 4 and 14.2, respectively. If we edit once again the value of DRI.08, 0 will appear once more. The following table shows the possible values for this parameter (a code for each motor type) and the associated values of the mentioned parameters.

DRI.08

BRAND 

INT.00 (A) MODEL

HP

KW

DRI.03 400 V

230 V

MACHINE CONSTANTS (ms) DRI.01

DRI.02

100

REIVAJ

075.22.0.30

7.5

5.5

4

8.0

13.9

79.4

79.4

101

REIVAJ

095.22.0.60

9.5

7

4

9.9

17.2

78.4

78.4

102

REIVAJ

130.20.0.90

7.5

5.5

6

10.5

18.2

50.3

50.3

103

REIVAJ

145.20.0.90

9.5

7

6

13.5

23.4

51.7

51.7

104

REIVAJ

055.22.0.61 055.22.0. 61  

5.5

4

4

7.0

12.5

64.5

64.5

200

SASSI

240095A-WF4

5.5

4

4

4.7

8.1

82.3

82.3

201

SASSI

240095A-WF4

8.0

5.9

4

8.4

14.6

71.6

71.6

202

SASSI

240118A-WF4

10.0

7.35

4

9.6

16.7

90.9

90.9

203

SASSI

240142A-WF4

12.5

9.2

4

11.2

94.3

94.3

204

SASSI

240142A-WF4

15.0

11

4

14.2

88.5

88.5

205

SASSI

240171A-WF4

18.0

13.2

4

15.5

95.0

95.0

TABLE 8.3: 8.3: Table of asynchronous machines

Not applicable  Not applicable  Not applicable 

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

51

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

8.4. Parameters of synchronous version This table of parameters is valid from version 613 or higher. It applies to synchronous machines only. As already mentioned in previous section 8.1, the access level of each parameter is mainly determined by the access code to the programming mode. In the here below table, there are two columns under the heading access code:

N: Normal access level A: Advanced access level The permissions for each parameter are given in accordance with the access code:

RW: Reading /Writing RO: Reading only H: Hidden PAGE/ GROUP 

ACCESS

PARAM

DESCRIPTION 

LEVEL  

N CNF.01

Type of inverter 

RO

DESCRIPTION OF VALUES 

RANGE 

A RO

Model of inverter concerning feeding and power. 

2: 3: 4: 6:

10 10 15 20

HP/400 HP/220 HP/400 HP/400

Vac Vac Vac Vac

DEFAULT VALUE Depending on the model

Digit 1 (from the right): Maximum no. of errors that may occur in 3 minutes. After this period, the inverter is locked until one of the following operations is carried out:  - Cut off power - Activate terminal 19 - Enter programming

Digit 0: 0...5 Digit 1: 3

CNF.02

Autoreset

RW

RW

Digit 2 (from right): 3: Strict and standard Out of phase error control (err 12) deactivated. Digit 3 (from right): Contactors state check setup while inverter is stopped.

Digit 3: 0, 1

35

Digit 4: 0, 1 Digit 5: 0

0: Enabled 1: Disabled Digit 4 (from right): Current sensors check setup CNF General Configuration 

the

CNF.03

Command source 

RW

RW

CNF.04

CAN Monitor 

RW

RW

It is specified whether monitoring via CAN is t o be activated 

CNF.05

Direction of movement

RW

RW

Specifies whether the direction of movement is to be reversed or not after a direction command 

configuration 

CNF.06

CNF.08 CNF.09

TR0 Travelling. General Parameters 

0: Enabled 1: Disabled It is specified whether the source of commands will be the terminals or the CAN. 

Viewing block configuration 

Parameter access client code  Parameter access client code 

RW

RW

RW

H

RW

H

Configures the viewing of the different viewing blocks. Digit 1: (from the right): Viewing of sinusoidal and absolute encoder block. 1, visible. 0 not visible.  Digit 2: Viewing of industrial encoder block. 1, visible. 0 not visible.  In both cases, it specifies the client code to access the parameters. It is done this way so that no value that may prevent parameterising is entered accidentally. 

0: Terminals 1: CAN 0: Deactivated 1: Interface v1 2: Interface v2 0: Does not reverse

0 0

0

1: Reverses  Digit 1: 0, 1 Digit 2: 0, 1 Digit 3: 0 Digit 4: 0 Digit 5: 0

0

0...9999

0

0...9999

0

CNF.10

Serial Number 

RO

RO

Informs of the equipment’s serial number. This value is unique for each equipment. 

0...65535

Number at the lower right corner. ADA-NNNNN

CNF.11

Software version 

RO

RO

Informs of the software version engraved on the equipment. 

N/A

613

TR0.00

Inspection speed 

RW

RW

0.20...65.00 Hz

5.00 Hz

TR0.01

Speed Limit 

RW

RW

0.00,0.05... ...45.00 Hz

0.00 Hz

Inspection operation speed (maintenance).  Output electrical frequency (open-loop) or motor rotation speed (closed-loop) that, when exceeded, switches the KRL1 relay. At (0 Hz), RL1 is not activated (terminals 30 _ 31 and 32). IMPORTANT This parameter MUST BE set to 0.00 if A3  Amendment is enabled A3A.00 = 1 or 2) 

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

52

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter PAGE/ GROUP 

ACCESS

PARAM

DESCRIPTION 

LEVEL  

N

TR0.02

Speed limit relay logic 

RW

DESCRIPTION OF VALUES 

RANGE 

A

RW

Allows configuring the speed limit relay logic. With positive logic (1), the relay will turn ON when the speed is above the pre-set limit, and OFF when below. With negative logic (0), the relay will turn ON when the speed is below the pre-set limit or stopped, and OFF when above the limit. Speed is understood as output electrical Frequency in open-loop or motor rotation speed in closed-loop mode.

DEFAULT VALUE

0: negative logic 1: positive logic

1

0..18

10%

1.00...65.00 Hz

10.00 Hz

00.01...20.00 Hz 00.30...10.00 s

01.00 Hz 02.50 s

0.10...15.00

01.50

00.30...10.00 s

02.20 s

0.10...15.00

1.00

1.00...65.00 Hz

10.00 Hz

00.01...20.00 Hz 00.30...10.00 s

01.00 Hz 01.00 s

0.10...15.00

1.00

00.30...10.00 s

01.50 s

0.10...15.00

1.00

IMPORTANT

TR0.03

Overspeed percentage 

RW

RW

THIS PARAMETER APPLIES IF PARAMETER A3A.00 IS SET TO 0 (A3 AMENDMENT DISABLED).  Allows configuring overspeed detection. With a 0 value, overspeed is determined on 18% of rated speed.  With a value between 10% and 18%, overspeed is determined with this same percentage on the target speed.  Rated speed 1

TR1.00

TR1 Travelling 1

Rated speed 

RW

RW

TR1.01 TR1.02

Approach speed  Acceleration time 

RW RW

RW RW

TR1.03

Modification Factor for Acceleration curve

RW

RW

TR1.04

Deceleration time 

RW

RW

TR1.05

Modification Factor for Deceleration curve

RW

RW

If the control is open-loop mode, the value of this parameter is the target electrical frequency. If the control is closed-loop mode, the value of this parameter is the target speed. Approach speed 1  Acceleration ramp time  The higher the value, the gentler the beginning of the curve and less gentle at the end. Only operative in Sinusoidal curve (RSN.00 = 2). Value 1 = neutral  Deceleration ramp 1 time  The higher the value, the gentler the beginning of the curve and less gentle at the end. Value 1 = neutral  Rated speed 2

TR2.00

TR2 Travelling Unit 2

RW RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

ARR.00

Linear start 

RW

RW

ARR.01 ARR.02

First Gear  Initial Time 

RW RW

RSN.00

S-type Curve 

RW

RSN.01

Acceleration Beginning K

RW

RW

RSN.02

Acceleration End K  RW

RW

RSN.03

Deceleration Beginning K

RW

TR2.05

RSN Normal S-ramp 

RSN.04 RSN.05 RSN.06

RSC Short S-Ramp   S-Ramp

RW

Deceleration End K  RW  Stopping curve time  Levelling adjustment 

RW RW RW

S-type Curve 

0: Standard 2: Sinusoidal 

2

1...999

50

1...999

50

1...999

10

1...999

50

RW

Time with milliseconds milliseconds accuracy of stopping curve  0.001...3.000 s

0.800

RW

RW

Levelling adjustment by load compensation 

0..200

100

0.000...6.000 s

0.000

0...100

70

00.01...02.50 s

00.80 s

00.01...02.50 s

01.00 s

00.01...02.50s

00.50s

00.01...01.00 s

00.25 s

RSC.01

Command increase percentage 

RW

RW

RW

RW

STC.01 STC.02 STC.03

0.10 1.50

RW

RW

brake

Gentleness at the beginning of the acceleration ramp. Higher number: Greater gentleness  Gentleness at the end of the acceleration ramp. Higher number: Greater gentleness  Gentleness at the beginning of the deceleration ramp. Higher number: Greater gentleness  Gentleness at the end of the deceleration ramp. Higher number: Greater gentleness 

0

RW

RW

delay  Brake prior to stop delay  Brake after stop delay  Waiting time of contactor switching at start 

If the control is in closed-loop mode, the value of this parameter is the target speed. Approach speed 2  Acceleration ramp 2 time  The higher the value, the gentler the beginning of the curve and less gentle at the end. Value 1 = neutral  Deceleration ramp 2 time  The higher the value, the gentler the beginning of the curve and less gentle at the end. Value 1 = neutral 

0: Enabled 1: Disabled  0.01..5.00 0.10..5.00

Extension time in short floor 

Pre-start

If the control is open-loop mode, the value of this parameter is the target electrical frequency.

This parameter allows enabling/disabling the initial speed ramp.   Final speed of initial speed ramp stated in hertz.  Time of initial ramp stated in seconds. 

RSC.00

STC.00 STC Start/Stop Control  

RW

RW RW

TR2.04

Start  

RW

Approach speed  Acceleration time  Modification Factor for Acceleration curve Deceleration time  Modification Factor for Deceleration curve

TR2.01 TR2.02 TR2.03

 ARR

Rated speed 

RW

RW

RW

RW

RO

RW

Stated with milliseconds accuracy, in short floor, it is the time the speed maintains at which a gear is changed.  Stated in %. The higher it is the gentler speed rectification in short floor (thus reducing the approach section).  Delay between brake activation command and start of motor spinning;  Time elapsed between speed 0 and brake deactivation.  Time elapsed between brake deactivation and motor power failure at a stop.  Specifies the waiting time for contactor switching at a start, stated in seconds. 

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

53

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter PAGE/ GROUP 

ACCESS

PARAM

DESCRIPTION 

STC.04

0 speed at a stop  Current value close to 0  Maximum time allowed for a current drop  Additional time for residual current to be equal to zero.  

LEVEL  

N STC.05 STC.06

STC.07

R

A RW

H

RO

H

RO

H

RO

DESCRIPTION OF VALUES 

RANGE 

Speed close to 0 at a stop.  Specifies the current value close to 0 stated in digital units. 

00.01...1.99 Hz

00.10 Hz

1...33

5

Specifies the maximum time allowed for a current drop stated in seconds. 

00.01...02.50 s

1.00 s

Specifies the additional time for residual current to be equal to zero stated in seconds. 

00.01...02.50 s

0.02 s

0: Reset/Error 1: N/Open Brake microswitches reading/activated 2: N/Closed Brake microswitches reading/deactivat ed

0

Determines the role of pin 19 in XC2 connector STC.08

Brake microswitch reading 

RW

RW

STC.09

Current drop time 

RW

RW

It determines the time current drop once the brake has been activated. 

0.00..3.00

1.00

ENC.00

Number pulses/turn. 

RW

RW

Number of pulses per encoder turn 

512, 1024, 2048, 4096

2048

of

IMPORTANT This parameter MUST BE set to 2 if  Amendment is enabled (A3A.00 = 1 or 2) 

A3

This parameter is used to depict the sinusoidal encoder being used. ENC Encoder

DEFAULT VALUE

ENC.01

RW

RW

Digit 1 (from the right): 1: Sinusoidal Encoder Digit 2 (from the right): 2: Endat protocol absolute encoder 

DRI.03 DRI.04 DRI.05 DRI.06

Number of poles  Resistance  Time constant  Inductance 

RW RO RO RO

RW RO RO RO

Number of motor poles. NOT THE NUMBER OF POLE PAIRS.  Machine resistance, stated in ohms.  Machine time constant stated in milli milliseconds. seconds.  Machine inductance, stated in mH. 

Digit 1: 1  Digit 2: 2 Digit 3: 0

21

Digit 4: 0 Digit 5: 0 

2...50 Even Number N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A 10/400: 17.8 A 10/220:

DRI Machine Data 

DRI.07

Motor rated current  RW  RW 

RW

This parameter specifies the rated current of the machine’s nameplate. 

35.5 A 2.0..31.8 A 15/400: 26.7 A 20/400: 31.8 A

DRI.08

Motor Model 

RW

RW

Specifies the motor model. On doing it, the complete profile of the specified machine is incorporated.  

0, machine table codes 

0

See Machine Table below.

INT.03

INT.04

INT.05

INT.06

Id Current Control Proportional Constant Id Current Integral Time Iq Current Control Proportional Constant Iq Current Control Integral Constant

RO

RW

Stated in V/A. 

1...250

10

RO

RW

Integration time. Stated in seconds. 

0.0000..6.5535

33.0

RO

RW

Stated in V/A. 

1...250

10

RO

RW

Integration time. Stated in seconds. 

0.0000..6.5535

33.0

INT Current Control  

INT.09

2nd  order filter and advance/delay network 

RW  RW 

RW

Allows configuring the 2 nd  order filter and the advance-delay network. 

INT.10

Offset Moment 

RO

RW

Determines when the offset is established. 

0: Disabled 1: 50 Hz 2: 150 Hz 3: 250 Hz 4: 400 Hz 5: 250 Hz (2) 6: Slot 1 7: Slot 2 8: 250 Hz (3) 9: 250 Hz (4) 10: 150 Hz (2) 0: After the contactors’ activation 1: Before the contactors’ activation 

2

0

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

54

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter PAGE/ GROUP 

ACCESS

PARAM VEL.00

VEL.01

VEL.02

VEL.03

VEL.04 VEL Speed Control VEL.05

VEL.07 VEL.08

VEL.09 VEL.10

DESCRIPTION 

LEVEL  

N RW

Approach Speed Control Proportional Constant Approach Speed Control Integral Time Stop Speed Integral Time Control Motor measured speed filter  Time for rated speed stability criterion  Time for Approach speed stability criterion.  Speed Control 

POS Position Control

Integration 

POS.00

Position Control Mode 

POS.01 POS.02

PEC Power Electronic Inverter

25000

RW

Stated in digital units 

1...64000

25000

RW

RW

Integration time. Stated in seconds. 

0.0000, 0.0100..6.5535

0.2000

RW

RW

Stated in digital units. 

1...64000

25000

RW

RW

Integration time. Stated in seconds. 

0.0000, 0.0100..6.5535

0.2000

RW

RW

Integration time. Stated in seconds. 

0.0000, 0.0100..6.5535

0.2000

RO

RW

The average data number raised to the 2nd power.  0...5

0

RO

RO

Stated with millisecond accuracy. Once the stability has been reached, the integral term will apply. 

0...3.000 s

0.512

RO

RO

Stated with millisecond accuracy. Only operative when bit 1 of VEL.10 is set to 1.  

0...3.000 s

0.512

RO

RW

If 5th  digit from right is set to 1, the moving window method will be used.

0, 10000

10000

RO

RW

0,1

1

0..3

1

0..4000

200

0..4000

200

0: Integrates according to stable speed.

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

1: Always integrates.

0: Deactivated 1: Activated, speed integral in starting and stopping 2: Activated, speed integral only in stopping 3: Activated, no speed integral It determines the value of the position control constant proportional.  It determines the value of the position control constant proportional.

Switching frequency  Type of modulation  Downtimes  Minimum pulse width 

RW

RW

Stated in KHz. 

5.5 – 14.0 KHz

RW H

RW RO

Type of modulation  Value in microseconds. 

0:PWM Triangular 00.500..03.000 µs

0 00.500 µs

H

RO

Value in microseconds. 

00.000..03.000 µs

00.000 µs

ADJ.00

Ir read gain 

H

RO

This parameter specifies the r read gain. 

0...65535

N/A

ADJ.01

Is read gain 

H

RO

This parameter specifies the s read gain. 

0...65535

N/A

PEC.00 PEC.01 PEC.02 PEC.03

12.0 KHz

ADJ.02

Vdc1 read gain 

H

RO

This parameter specifies the bus voltage read gain. 

0...65535

N/A

ADJ.03

A-channel zero 

H

RO

This parameter specifies A channel zero. 

0..4095

N/A

ADJ.04

B-channel zero 

H

RO

This parameter specifies B-channel zero. 

0..4095

N/A

H

RO

0..65535

N/A

H

RO

0..8191

N/A

H

RO

This parameter must not be adjusted by hand. Its value will be given by the p ole adjustment. 

0..4095

N/A

H

RO

This parameter specifies the sinusoidal encoder’s peak value. 

1024..2048

N/A

ADJ.05 ADJ.06 ADJ  Adjustments, Measurements absolute and sinusoidal encoder.  

Start. Proportional Constant Stop. Proportional Constant

DEFAULT VALUE

1...64000

Speed control VEL.11

RANGE 

Stated in digital units 

Start Prop Constant  Rated Speed Control Proportional RW Constant Rated Speed Control Integral Time

DESCRIPTION OF VALUES 

A RW

ADJ.07

ADJ.08

Amplitude adjustment  Absolute encoder’s coupling offset  Sinusoidal encoder’s coupling offset  Sinusoidal encoder’s peak value 

This parameter specifies the sinusoidal encoder’s amplitude adjustment.  This parameter must not be adjusted by hand. Its value will be given by the p ole adjustment. 

This parameter is used to depict the sinusoidal encoder being used.

ADJ.09

Sinusoidal encoder characteristics 

Digit 1 (from the right): Sinusoidal encoder direction. 1, reverses direction; 0, in the opposite case. H

RO Digit 2 (from the right): Electrical angle direction. 1, reverses direction; 0, in the opposite case. Digit 3 (from the right): Sinusoidal encoder auto adjustment. 

Digit 1: 0, 1 Digit 2: 0, 1 Digit 3: 0, 1 Digit 4: 0 Digit 5: 0

N/A

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

55

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter PAGE/ GROUP 

ACCESS

PARAM

DESCRIPTION 

DESCRIPTION OF VALUES 

LEVEL  

N

Specifies

RES Rescue

RES.00

Rescue Mode 

RW

RW

RES.01

Speed mode 

RW

RW

in

rescue

RANGE 

A

RES.03

Acceleration time 

RW

RW

RES.04

Start speed 

RW

RW

RES.05

Start acceleration time 

RW

RW

RES.06

Rated Current 

RW

RW

RES.07

Maximum speed of rescue by unbalanced load 

RW

RW

the

activation/deactivation

and

DEFAULT VALUE

0: Disabled 1: Enabled automatic rescue mode with batteries, WITHOUT detecting favourable direction. 2: Enabled

configuration of the rescue mode. 

automatic rescue mode with batteries, WITH detecting favourable direction. 3: Enabled rescue mode with UPS and without batteries. 

0

Specifies the speed in rescue mode. 

0.10..20.00 Hz

1.25 Hz

0.30..10.00 s

6.00 s

0.01..5.00 Hz

0.10 Hz

0.10..5.00s

1.20 s

1.0..4.0 A

1.5 A

0.10..20.00 Hz

5.00 Hz

Acceleration time in rescue mode stated in seconds.  Only applies to rescue mode without batteries (RES.00=3). Final speed of initial speed ramp stated in Hertz. Equivalent to parameter ARR.01, but in rescue mode.  Only applies to rescue mode without batteries (RES.00=3). Time of initial ramp stated in seconds. Equivalent to parameter ARR.01, but in rescue mode.  Only applies to rescue mode without batteries (RES.00=3). With the aim of protecting and guaranteeing the completion of the rescue, maximum output motor current is limited to twice the amount entered in this parameter. Equivalent to parameter DRI.07, but in rescue mode.  Only applies to rescue mode without batteries (RES.00=3). If, during the completion of a rescue, it shifts to rescue mode by unbalanced load, maximum speed will be limited. If 18% of this value is exceeded, error 11 will occur.  Digit 1 (from the right): Pole adjustment 0: Deactivated 8: Activated. Offset in inverter. 9: Activated. Offset in encoder Digit 2 (from the right): Adjustment of Sinusoidal enc. 0: Deactivated 1: Adjustment of zeros, amplitude and peak value. 2: Adjustment of direction

TUN.00

Autotuning activation 

RW

RW

TUN  Autotuning

3: Adjustment of zeros, amplitude, peak value and cycles per encoder turn. 4: Adjustment of directions and cycles per encoder turn. 8: Adjustment of zeros, amplitude, peak value and directions. 9: Adjustment of zeros, amplitude, peak value, cycles per encoder turn and directions. Digit 3 (from the right): Calculation of no. of poles.  0: Deactivated 9: Activated

Digit 0: 0, 8, 9 Digit 1: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9 Digit 2: 0, 9

00000

Digit 3: 0, 9 Digit 4: 0 

Digit 4 (from the right): RL calculation  0: Deactivated 9: Activated

TUN.01

Current sensors’ adjustment activation 

RW

RW

A current sensor amplitude adjustment will be executed. During this process, the machine brake is not released; therefore, it cannot be executed in MES or inspection mode and the car and counterweight DO NOT NEED TO BE HUNG. 

0: Deactivated 1: Activated 

0

V0.01 – 04/2013

56

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter PAGE/ GROUP 

ACCESS

PARAM

DESCRIPTION 

LEVEL  

N

DESCRIPTION OF VALUES 

RANGE 

A

DEFAULT VALUE

This parameter specifies whether the function associated to A3 amendment is specified. IMPORTANT NOTE:  NOTE:  If the value of this parameter is different from zero, that is to say, if A3 amendment function is activated, either with (1) or without (2) automatic reset, therefore: A3A.00 A3A

A3 amendment activation 

RW

RW

1) KRL1 function as speed limit relay is cancelled, thus leaving without effect some of the parameters TR0.01 (speed limit relay speed) or T R0.02 (speed limit logic).

 A3 amendment function 

A3A.01

Sampling time 

0: Deactivated 1: Activated, automatic reset 2: Activated,

1

 

manual reset

2) Regardless of the value assigned to parameter STC.08, input XC2/19 is set as normally closed brake microswitch reading.  This parameter specifies the time during which the brake microswitch signal will will be analysed. RW

1.50..6.00 s

RW

2.00s

This parameter will only be effective if A3A.00 has a value different from zero (1 or 2). 

TABLE 8.4

Parameter DRI.08 (motor model code) is a fictitious parameter. On entering the motor code, the values of the parameters associated to the machine profile, as stated in the profile tables, are set. However, their values do not remain.

For instance: instance: We edit the parameter DRI.08 and enter the value 1101. It is the profile associated to the MAGO 125.2.240. In so doing, the console display will l show “Po” blinking, i.e. the entered value is right. If we refer to the profile associated to this machine, we will find the following table:

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

57

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter PARAM

VALUE

DESCRIPTION

TR0.00

6.00

TR0.03

10

TR1.00

18.50

TR1.01

1.00

Approach speed

TR1.02

2.50

Acceleration time

TR1.03

1.50

Modification factor for acceleration curve

TR1.04

2.50

Deceleration time

TR1.05

1.00

Modification factor for Deceleration curve

TR2.00

7.00

Rated speed (2nd Bank)

TR2.01

0.70

Approach speed (2nd Bank)

ARR.00

1

ARR.01

0.15

Final speed of start ramp

ARR.02

1.40

Time of start ramp

STC.00

2.00

Pre-start brake delay

STC.01

1.00

Brake delay prior to stop

STC.02

2.00

Brake delay after stop

STC.08

2

STC.09 DRI.03

0.50 14

Number of poles

DRI.04

2.9

Resistance (Ohms)

DRI.05

9.1

Machine time constant (ms)

DRI.06

26.3

Inductance (mH)

DRI.07

10.5

Rated current

INT.03

13

INT.04

18.2

INT.05

13

INT.06

18.2

INT.09

2

UEL.00

20000

Speed Control Proportional Constant. Start.

UEL.01

20000

Speed Control Proportional Constant. Rated.

UEL.02

0.2000

Speed Control Integral Time. Rated.

UEL.03

20000

Speed Control Proportional Constant. Approach.

UEL.04

0.2000

Speed Control Integral Time. Approach.

UEL.05

0.2000

Speed Control Integral Time. Stop.

UEL.10

10000

Speed Reading Mode

POS.00

1

POS.01

250

Position Control at Start

POS.02

250

Position Control at Stop

PEC.00

14.0

Switching Frequency

RES.01

2.50

Speed in rescue mode

RES.03

6.00

Acceleration time

RES.04

0.10

Final Speed of Start Ramp in rescue mode

RES.05 RES.06

1.20 1.5

Acceleration time of Start Ramp in rescue mode Rated current in rescue mode

RES.07

5.00

Maximum speed of rescue by unbalanced load in rescue mode

Inspection speed Percentage, overspeed error detection Rated speed

Enabling of start ramp

Brake microswitch reading. Normally closed. Current drop time

Id Current Control Proportional Constant Id Current Control Integral Time Iq Current Control Proportional Constant Iq Current Control Integral Constant Current Filter

Mode/Activating Position Control

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

58

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter Each and every parameter in the table will be modified and the value assigned to each of them will be the one entered in the profile table. If value DRI.08 is re-edited, value 0 will be displayed again. If value 0 is set, no parameter will be modified. If a valid code corresponding to the machine profile is entered, it will modify the values of the parameters in the associated profile. If a number different from zero not corresponding to any machine code is entered, “P.Err” will be displayed on the console (not valid value). The following table displays the possible values for this parameter for synchronous machines (a code for each type of motor) and the values associated to the above-mentioned parameters.

BRAND

MODEL

DESCRIPTION

DRI.08

MP

MaGO 075.2.240

375 Kg 2:1 1m/s 3.0 KW

1099

MP

MaGO 100.2.240 v.B (*) (*)  

450 Kg 2:1 1m/s 3.4 KW

1100

MP

MaGO 125.2.240 v.B v.B (*)  (*)  

630 Kg 2:1 1m/s 4.2 KW

1101

MP

MaGO 150.2.240

750 Kg 2:1 1m/s 6.0 KW

1102

MP

MaGO 175.2.240

1000 Kg 2:1 1m/s 7.5 KW 10 HP P=1400 Kg

1103

MP

MaGO 175.2.240

1000 Kg 2:1 1m/s 7.5 KW 15 HP P=1800 Kg

1104

MP

MaGO 200.2.240 v.B v.B (*)  (*)  

1125 Kg 2:1 1m/s 8.0 KW

1105

MP

MaGO 200.2.240 v.A

1125 Kg 2:1 1m/s 8.0 KW

1106

MP

MaGO 250.2.240

1250 Kg 2:1 1m/s 10.2 KW

1107

MP

MaGO 150.1.240

375 Kg 1:1 1m/s 3.0 KW

1108

MP

MAGO 175.1.240

450 Kg 1:1 1m/s 3.5 KW

1109

MP

MaGO 200.1.240

480 Kg 1:1 1m/s 4.0 KW

1110

MP

MAGO 225.1.240

525 Kg 1:1 1m/s 4.5 KW

1111

MP

MAGO 275.1.240

630 Kg 1:1 1m/s 5.9 KW

1113

MP

MaGO 175.1.320

300 Kg 1:1 1m/s 2.6 KW

1120

MP

MaGO 200.1.320

375 Kg 1:1 1m/s 3.0 KW

1121

MP

MaGO 225.1.320

450 Kg 1:1 1m/s 3.5 KW

1122

MP

MaGO 250.1.320

525 Kg 1:1 1m/s 3.8 KW

1123

MP

MaGO 275.1.320 275.1.320  

630 Kg 1:1 1m/s 4.4 KW

1124

ZIEHL ABEGG

ZETATOP SM225.40

1000 Kg 2:1 1m/s 11 KW

1202

ZIEHL ABEGG

ZETATOP SM225.60B-20

800 Kg 1:1 1m/s 7 KW

1203

MP

MaGO 200.2.240.16

1250 Kg 2:1 1.6m/s 12.77 KW

1301   1301

MP

MaGO 275.1.400

700 NM 1:1 1m/s 3.5 KW

1403   1403

CEG

MINI ACT 130 v.2

300 Kg 1.1 1m/s 2.6 KW

1500

CEG

MINI ACT 170 v.2

450 Kg 1:1 1m/s 3.7 KW

1501

(*)The profiles of previous versions of these machines can be found in the SSP web site (ssp.macpuarsa.es) through the links Software Versions|3VFMAC, in the section Related Info|Synchronous Machine Profiles. In order to be granted the access to this website you must have been provided with a username and a password. If not, send your request to the After Sales Department.

V0.01 – 04/2013

59

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 9. Control of the inverter This chapter describes in detail the inverter signals involved in its control. These signals can be divided into two large groups: Voltage-free inputs  inputs  enable the inverter to be operated by any type of control board. The connection terminals are located in connector XC2 or XC10, depending on the type of control board. Furthermore, 3VFMAC-DSP 6P is equipped with a special additional input in connector XC3 for the rescue or emergency signal. Voltage-free outputs: outputs: The equipment includes 3 relays with outputs through voltage-free contacts. The connection terminals are located in connector XC4. The function and sequence of these relays cannot be modified by means of configuration. Within each group of control inputs and outputs, some are optional and some are compulsory. When we describe them, we will indicate for each one whether it is compulsory or optional. The signals marked with (*) must be imperatively incorporated. The remaining ones are optional.

PICTURE 9.1 (*)The three LEDs of voltage-free outputs are located at this place. In addition to these three LEDs, in the upper part, you can find the LED EM, associated to the activation signal input of the automatic rescue with batteries.

V0.01 – 04/2013

60

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 9.1. Inputs If the control board operating the inverter is MicroBasic or a non-MP one, the used connection terminals will be those of connector XC2. If the control board operating the inverter is Via Serie, the used connection terminals will be those of connector XC10. Independently of the  the  used connector (XC2 or XC10), the references of the connection terminals will be the same ones. The only input signal that is not located in connectors XC2/XC10 is the rescue or emergency signal (EM). Like for the other signals, it is a voltage-free signal, so that for DSP rescue with 5 batteries the terminals 20 and 23 of the connector XC3 can be used; but, in case of DSP rescue with 4 batteries (asynchronous) or DSP-UPS rescue without batteries (synchronous) the terminals 21 and 23 of the same XC3 connector shall be used. Let us remind that the state of the input signals can be monitored through the input LEDs, as shown in picture 9.1. Those LEDs are silk-screen printed with a number that coincides with the ones of the terminals of the input signals:

PICTURE 9.2 The monitoring LED of the rescue or emergency input signal (EM) is in a different bank of LEDs, close to the LEDs of the output signal activation; it is silk-screen printed with EM.

9.1.1. Emergency stop (contactors’ ( contactors’ reading) Connector XC13, terminals 11 and 12. It is compulsory (*). This signal informs informs the frequency inverter that the contactors K1 and K2 are activated. It analyses the signal when activating the relay KRL2 (by activating the contactors). At the beginning of a service or during it, if the EMERGENCY STOP signal disappears, the inverter will immediately cut off the energy supply, it will deactivate the triac KRL2 of contactors, brake relay KRL3 and it will display the error 0E (uncontrolled opening of contactors). This situation shall occur when any safety contact of the installation opens during a service (for instance: default in door lock contact). When the error 0E appears, it is displayed for approximately 1 second and during this period the inverter is inhibited (it does not accept any command input signal). After that time, it starts running normally again.

9.1.2. Run Connector XC2/XC10, terminal 13. It is compulsory (*) (*).. This signal activation triggers the execution of a service, therefore causing the start-up sequence indicated in the diagram of starting and stopping.

9.1.3. Rated speed / Approach speed Connector XC2/XC10, terminal 14. It is compulsory (*) (*).. This signal informs the inverter about which has to be the motor turn frequency:  Activated : RATED speed. Deactivated : APPROACH speed. By changing this signal, the frequency will gradually be modified (depending on the acceleration, deceleration times and the S-curves), until reaching the frequency/speed target. The rated speed is determined by the parameter TR1.00 value and the approach speed by the parameter TR1.01 value. If the input signal of the speed 2nd bank is activated (refer to next section), the rated speed will be determined by the parameter TR2.00 and the approach speed by the parameter TR2.01.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

61

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 9.1.4. 2nd Speed Bank Connector XC2/XC10, terminal 15. Optional.   This signal activation enables using a second group of RATED AND APPROACH speeds:

Terminal 15 

RATED SPEED

DEACTIVATED

TR1.00

ACTIVATED

TR2.00

PARAMETERS APPROACH SPEED TR1.01

TABLE 9.1

TR2.01

If you do not need to use this function, keep the terminal nr 15 unconnected.

9.1.5. Inspection speed (*)..  Connector XC2/XC10, terminal 16. Compulsory (*) Its activation selects the motor turn frequency in inspection mode. Connect to the terminal nr 16 a contact of the inspection switch or a contact of a relay activated by this switch. The contact must be normally closed, i.e., open when the inspection mode is activated. Therefore, this signal is interpreted by the inverter in the following way:  Activated : Control board in normal operation, NOT in inspection operation. Deactivated : Control board in inspection operation.

The inspection speed is defined in the parameter TR0.00. In inspection mode it is recommended to deactivate the contactors from the control board without any delay (by opening the run contactors). This way, the lift will stop immediately as soon as you stop  pressing the upw upward ard or downward downward com command, mand, allowing allowing quicker quicker an and d mor more e precise maintena maintenance nce work works. s.   In the installations supplied by MP, inspection operation is made this way. Therefore, whenever you stop pressing the upward or downward command (in inspection), the error 0E will appear, as the contactors are immediately deactivated from the control board.

9.1.6. 2nd Acceleration Bank Connector XC2/XC10, terminal 17. Optional.   The acceleration and deceleration times define how long it takes to the frequency inverter spends to go from frequency/speed zero to frequency/rated speed (acceleration) and from frequency/rated speed to frequency/approach speed (deceleration). The 2º bank of ACCELERATION / DECELERATION signal enables using two different groups of parameters to carry out the acceleration and deceleration in the motor:

Terminal 17  DEACTIVATED ACTIVATED

PARAMETERS ACCELERATION TIME DECELERATION TIME MODIFICATION FACTOR MODIFICATION FACTOR TR1.04 TR1.05 TR2.04 TR2.05

TR1.02 TR1.03 TR2.02 TR2.03 TABLE 9.2

If you do not need to use this function, keep the terminal nr 17 unconnected.

V0.01 – 04/2013

62

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 9.1.7. Run direction Connector XC2/XC10, terminal 18. Compulsory (*) (*)..  It allows selecting the motor turn direction without needing to use an additional contactor to carry out the up and down movement of the lift. To adjust the run direction, it is recommended to operate in inspection or MES mode. Press the upward or downward button. On this point, we have to make the difference between asynchronous and synchronous motors:  ASYNCHRONOUS  ASYNCHRON OUS   When commissioning the lift, if you observe that the movement direction is reversed, exchange 2 phases of the power output to motor. Do not modify the UP / DOWN signal wiring, neither the phases of the frequency inverter power.

SYNCHRONOUS

IMPORTANTE : With synchronous motors, when commissioning the lift, if you observe that the movement direction is reversed, NEVER exchange the output phases to motor.

The exchange of the output phases to motor will cause an erratic functioning, a blocking or a runaway of the machine. To set the proper run direction: 1) Set the control board in inspection or MES mode. 2) Press the up (or down) button. - 

If it runs down (or up), i.e., if the motion direction is the reverse of the commanded one, modify the parameter CNF.05: If CNF.05 = 1, set CNF.05 = 0 If CNF.05 = 0, set CNF.05 = 1

- Try again to press the up (or down) button.

9.1.8 Error reset/reading of brake microswitches/reading of overspeed governor interlocking coil state (EN81+A3 amendment) Connector XC2, terminal 19. Optional. This terminal is not available in the connector XC10.   In asynchronous  motors, this terminal function is configured through the parameter A3A.00 as following:

A3A.00 0 1 2

FUNCTION ERROR RESET READING OF OVERSPEED GOVERNOR INTERLOCKING COIL STATE (EN81+A3 amendment). AUTOMATIC RESET. READING OF OVERSPEED GOVERNOR INTERLOCKING COIL STATE (EN81+A3 amendment). MANUAL RESET.

TABLE 9.3

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

63

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter In synchronous  motors, this terminal function can be configured through the parameters A3A.00 and/or STC.08 as following:

A3A.00

0

STC.08 0 1 2

1

ANY (0, 1, 2) Ineffective

2

ANY (0, 1, 2) Ineffective

FUNCTION ERROR RESET READING OF BRAKE MICROSWITCHES N/OPEN READING OF BRAKE MICROSWITCHES N/CLOSED READING OF BRAKE MICROSWITCHES N/CLOSED. FUNCTION EN81+AMENDEMENT A3 ACTIVATED WITH AUTOMATIC RESET. READING OF BRAKE MICROSWITCHES N/CLOSED. FUNCTION EN81+AMENDEMENT A3 ACTIVATED WITH AUTOMATIC RESET. TABLE 9.4

From this table, we deduce that the value of STC.08 takes effect if and only if A3 amendment function is not activated, i.e., if A3A.00 = 0. If this function is activated (A3A.00=1 or 2), the reading of brake microswitches will be activated in normally closed mode, INDEPENDENTLY of the recorded value in STC.08. Automatic reset means that the occurrence of an error associated to A3 amendment will NEVER leave the inverter in permanent out of service. On the contrary, the manual reset means that the occurrence of any error associated to A3 amendment will leave the inverter in permanent out of service, so that, to reactivate it, the presence of maintenance staff is required. required . The meaning of both terms applies to the EN-81+ A3 amendment function and it is the same for both asynchronous and synchronous motors.

9.1.8.1. Error Reset Function  The frequency inverter can detect different error situations that cause the lift stop. When an error occurs, the inverter requires a RESET to be done to go on operating after. There are four possible ways to apply a RESET: a) By turning off and on again the equipment. b) By using the AUTORESET function (CNF.02, the digit on right). Automatically, the equipment carries out a maximum number of RESET during a period (3 minutes). c) By entering in PROGRAMMING mode and coming back to RUN mode. d) By applying the ERROR RESET. The activation of the ERROR RESET signal takes no effect when the inverter is giving energy. When the equipment does not supply energy and the terminal nr 19 is activated: a) The display shows the text RESET blinking as long as the signal applies. b) If there was an error, it will be reset. c) The moment the signal is not applied any more, the equipment will be ready to carry out a new service. If there was an error, it will be reset and the moment the signal is not applied any more, the equipment will be ready to carry out a new service. As long as the signal is activated, the inverter will not carry out any service, even if the RUN output remains activated.

The activation of the ERROR   RESET signal does not avoid that the AUTORESET function records one unit more (on the counter of maximum number of RESET during a period of 3 minutes) when an error appears.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

64

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter Do not make an usual use of the ERROR external RESET signal. The AUTORESET function ensures that sporadic errors do not cause the lift permanent stop; however, in case of repetitive occurrence of errors (that could lead the lift to critical situations), the equipment stops operating. 9.1.8.2. Function reading of brake microswitches (Synchronous machines only) The synchronous machines are equipped with two brake discs. Each of them includes a microswitch to allow its state monitoring. There are two possibilities: Normally open open:: with deactivated brake (mechanically closed), open. Normally closed : with deactivated brake (mechanically closed), closed. As there is only one input, both brake microswitches must be wired together, in parallel or in series. The MP machines are supplied with normally closed in series microswitches. As said before, this signal is optional, even if its use is highly recommended.

IMPORTANT: If the parameter STC.08 is set to 0 and the parameter A3A.00 is set to 0 (ERROR RESET function), we must disconnect the terminal 19 of the connector XC2. Otherwise, even if receiving the RUN signal (terminal 13), the inverter will not start.

9.1.8.3. Reading of overspeed governor interlocking coil state (EN81 + A3) (Asynchronous machines only) To implement A3 amendment function on installations with asynchronous machines (geared), an overspeed governor interlocking coil is used. When this device is inactivated, the overspeed governor is interlocked. When it is activated, the overspeed governor is released. This device is fully commanded by the inverter: the activation is carried out through the relay KRL1 (XC4, 32-33) and its state reading is carried out through the microswitch included into the interlocking device and through the input XC2/19: - Activated input (led 19 on): interlocked overspeed governor. - Deactivated input (led 19 off): released overspeed governor. Let us suppose that the inverter is included in a controller provided with A3 amendment function. If the parameter A3A.00 is set to 0, i.e., if A3 amendment function is disabled in the inverter, the input 19 function is ERROR RESET. Therefore, the inverter will display the text “rESEt” blinking and even if receiving the RUN signal (terminal 13), the inverter will not start running.

9.1.9. Rescue signal (EM) Connector XC3, terminals 20 and 23 or 21 and 23. Optional. This voltage-free input proceeding from the control board is a special input. This signal activation causes that, after being properly configured, the inverter enters a special operating mode: automatic rescue mode. There are 3 automatic rescue modes, detailed in the following table:

AUTOMATIC RESCUE MODE

Terminals XC3

DSP Rescue 5 batteries

20-23

DSP DSP  Rescue 4 batteries

21-23

UPS Rescue (without batteries)

21-23 TABLE 9.5

•  • 

•  • 

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

65

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter At this moment, the DSP Rescue 4 batteries mode is the standard rescue mode for asynchronous machines and the UPS Rescue (without batteries) mode is the rescue mode for synchronous machines. The reason why the DSP Rescue 5 batteries mode (synchronous and asynchronous) remains is the compatibility with existing installations where it is incorporated. For the full description of the rescue or emergency special function, refer to Chapter 9, section 9.5. However, it is important to highlight two things regarding the input signals: 1. During all the rescue process, the rescue signal will remain activated. If the input of the rescue signal is deactivated for more than 3 seconds during the process, the inverter will interrupt the rescue operation. If the signal is reactivated, it will start from the beginning. 2. In rescue mode, the only voltage-free input in the main board input connector (XC2/XC10) that 3VFMACDSP 6P will take into consideration will be the RUN signal (#13), as its activation will determine the beginning of the rescue process. The target speed and the direction will be determined by the inverter itself according to the rescue mode (DSP 5 batteries, DSP 4 batteries or DSP-UPS), the load and the parameters associated to the  the rescue module (group RES).

9.2. Voltage-free outputs  The equipment is equipped with 2 relays and one triac that offer outputs through voltage-free contacts. The connection terminals are located in the connector XC4. El state of the output signals can be monitored at the output LEDs, located as shown in the Picture 9.1. A zoom on the area of the output LEDs will let us see what is shown on the following figure:

OUTPUT LEDS

SILK-SCREEN PRINTING EM SP

DESCRIPTION Input of rescue signal Relay of speed limit Interlocking of overspeed governor Monitor of activity

K

Contactors’ output (triac)

BK

Relay of brake activation TABLE 9.6

9.2.1. Relay of speed limit/Interlocking limit/Interlocking of overspeed governor/Monitor of activity (KRL1) Connector XC4, terminals 32 and 33. It is optional. This output function depends on the inverter/motor type and on if the installation is provided with EN81+A3 Amendment, as reflected in the following table:

INVERTER TYPE EN81 A3 amendment YES A3A.00 = 1, 2 NO A3A.00 = 0

Interlocking/Release Overspeed governor

Inverter state monitoring

Relay of speed limit TABLE 9.7

The KRL1 function selection is configured by means the set value in parameter A3A.00: 0: Relay of speed limit. 1: A3 Amendment function with automatic reset. The occurrence of an error associated to A3 amendment will NEVER leave the inverter in permanent out of service. 2: A3 Amendment function with manual reset. The occurrence of any error associated to A3 amendment will the inverter in permanent out of service, so that, to reactivate it, the presence of maintenance staffleave is required.

The specific features of the function implementation associated to A3 amendment depend on the motor type: interlocking/release of the overspeed governor for asynchronous machines or state monitoring of the inverter for synchronous machines.

V0.01 – 04/2013

66

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter Let us suppose that the inverter is included in a controller provided with A3 Amendment function. If the parameter A3A.00 is set to 0, i.e., if A3 Amendment function is disabled in the inverter, the input 19 function is ERROR RESET. Therefore, the inverter will display the text “rESEt” blinking and even if receiving the RUN signal (terminal 13), the inverter will not start running.

9.2.1.1. Relay of speed limit It enables informing the controller the electrical frequency output (open-loop control) or the actual speed of the machine (closed-loop mode) is higher than the defined limit at the parameter TR0.01. A switching of the relay of speed limit can be done when the value set in parameter TR0.01 has been exceeded by: a) a)   The output frequency, if the equipment operates in open-loop control b) b)   The actual speed of the motor, if the equipment operates in closed-loop control If the parameter is set to zero, the switching of relay of logic of contacts will never occur. Depending on the set out logic in the parameter TR0.02, the relay will be operated in the following way: a) Positive logic (TR0.02 = 1) Lower value than TR0.01: open contact Higher value than TR0.01: closed contact b) Negative logic (TR0.02 = 0) Lower value than TR0.01: closed contact Higher value than TR0.01: open contact Use this relay when the lift is provided with approach to floor with doors pre-opening. The inverter will inform on the moment that the car speed is lower than a determined value (required by EN-81). Example: In a lift of 1.0 m/s in which we want to start the doors pre-opening when the speed is lower than 0.15 m/s, if 1 m/s corresponds to 50.00 Hz, at 0.15 m/s, the output frequency would correspond to (50.00*0.15) / 1.0 = 7.50 Hz. Therefore, the parameter TR0.03 value should be set to 7.50 Hz.  

9.2.1.2. Overspeed governor Interlocking/Release This function is available for those asynchronous inverters provided with A3 Amendment function activated. With asynchronous machines (geared), the interlocking coil of the overspeed governor is used. When this device is inactivated, the overspeed governor is interlocked. When it is activated, the overspeed governor is released. This device is fully commanded by the inverter: the activation is carried out through the relay KRL1 and its state reading is carried out through the microswitch included into the interlocking device and through the input XC2/19. To check whether the inverter has activated or not KRL1, we will visualize the SP LED state (refer to table 9.6): • On: Overspeed governor released. • Off: Overspeed governor interlocked.

Therefore, when the lift is stopped, KRL1 is deactivated (SP LED off). When the lift is moving, KRL1 shall be activated (SP LED on). For further information, refer to chapter 5 about electrical installation.

9.2.1.3. Inverter state monitoring This function is available for those asynchronous inverters provided with A3 Amendment function activated. This voltage-free output is directly connected to a main board input: in Via Serie, the input KP2; in MicroBasic, the input 4. Thus, the control board is informed at any time about the inverter state: •

  • 

KRL1 will be activated, SP LED on, if the inverter is ready to carry out a service. KRL1 will be deactivated, SP LED off, if the inverter is not ready to carry out a service. The inverter will be “offline” if it is in permanent out of service due to an error, or it is in programming mode or it is off.

For further information, refer to chapter 5 about electrical installation.

V0.01 – 04/2013

67

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 9.2.2. Contactors’ control triac (KRL2) (*) Connector XC4, terminals 34 and 35. It is compulsory. The CONTACTORS’ CONTROL enables the inverter to carry out the optimum (in comfort terms) starting and stopping sequence, by acting on the contactors. The activation of the contactors is commanded by three groups of contacts placed in series: a) Contacts of the safety chain. b) Control from the control board (the run contactors). c) Control from the frequency inverter through KRL2. Refer to the diagrams at chapter 5 to check the required wiring of the contactors’ control, in order to obtain a proper operation.

9.2.3. Relay of brake control (KRL3) (*) Connector XC4, terminals 36 and 37. It is compulsory. 3VFMAC-DSP inverter carries out the mechanical brake control of the drive machine through the relay KRL3. This output is used to activate an external relay or contactor of the brake. A brake relay contact (or brake external contactor) will be placed in series with contacts of the contactors K1 and K2. This brake control is the most usual, the most reliable and the cheapest. The relay KRL3 makes possible an easy brake control that provides great comfort: 1. The relay KRL3 will command an external relay KRFR (brake relay).

Diagram 9.1

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

68

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 2. A contact of each contactor and a contact of KRFR will be placed in series.

Diagram 9.2

Depending on the brake type and/or the machine type, the power supply, the brake actuator device and the advisability or not of using a filter (A*) and/or varistors can vary. For further information, refer to chapter 5 about electrical installation.

9.3. Sequence This section describes the logical sequence, in normal mode, for the activation of the input and output signals. For the description of the DSP rescue function, refer to chapter 9, section 9.5 as it is a special operation mode. The RUN signal (XC2/XC10-13) activation triggers the execution of a service, therefore causing the starting sequence shown in starting and stopping diagram 9.1.

The RUN signal comes out from the control board and is responsible of its deactivation (causing the stopping sequence) as soon as the level floor is reached. The control board must wait until the inverter opens the contactors. This opening informs the control board that now the service can be achieved. The contactors’ control   is carried out together from the control board and the inverter. The control board’s run contactors and the inverter KRL2 are in series. Therefore, to avoid the activation of the contactors, both output signals have to be activated in both the control board and the inverter. However, the activation of these signals has to be carried out according to sequence shown in the here below table:

CONTACTORS’ CONTROL STARTING SEQUENCE STOPPING SEQUENCE 1º

Safety contacts closed  closed 

2º

The run contactors are activated. The RUN signal is

3º

activated.   activated.  The frequency inverter activates KRL2 and closes the contactors   contactors The lift starts  starts 

4º

The floor level is reached. The RUN signal is deactivated The motor is electrically stopped. KRL2 is deactivated and the contactors are open. open.   The run contactors are deactivated.   deactivated. The service finishes  finishes 

Where: Action achieved by the control board Action achieved by the inverter TABLE 9.8 9.8   If the starting and stopping sequences are not carried out like explained or if, during a service, the safety chain or the run contactors are eventually open, the error 0E will be generated and KRL2 (contactors) and KRL3 (brake) will be deactivated. The inverter will remain disabled for approximately 1 s., the error will be reset and, then, the equipment will be ready to operate again. El error 0E is “” (AUTO RESET type)   5; i.e., even if it appears many times, it will never cause the inverter permanent stop.

  As we will see forward in chapter 10, there are two types of errors: “uncountable” (AUTO RESET   type) and “countable” (NO  AUTORESET). The digit on the right of parameter CNF.02 determines the maximum number of errors for three minutes. Whenever a “countable”   error (NO AUTORESET) occurs, the counter increases the recording of errors. When the value of the digit on the 5

right of parameter CNF.02 is reached, the inverter remains out of service. V0.01 – 04/2013

69

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

V0.01 – 04/2013

70

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter The brake control , unlike the contactors’ control, is exclusively carried out by the frequency inverter. During the starting sequence KRL3 is activated (the brake opens) just after the contactors have been activated (after activating KRL2). So as not to start the motor turn until the brake is full open, the target frequency/speed does not begin to increase (acceleration ramp) until the time defined in parameter STC.00 is elapsed after the KRL3 acting. During the stopping sequence, KRL3 is deactivated (therefore acting the mechanical brake) before deactivating the contactors. Before deactivating KRL3, the motor will be electrically blocked and it will wait as long as the time defined by the parameter STC.01 (brake delay before the stop). The detailed and full execution of a service by the inverter is set out in previous page, schema 9.3: starting and stopping, with all the involved inputs and outputs, as well as the associated parameters. The function of   position control and also the parameter STC.09 apply to synchronous motors only. This parameter determines the current drop time after the brake closing. In this machine type, as there is no gear, if the current is abruptly interrupted, a snapping noise occurs, because of the little play of the brake.

The   magnetizing time (3), indicated in the starting sequence, applies to asynchronous motors  The motors   ONLY. This motor type, unlike synchronous motors, does not have permanent magnets. Therefore, the magnetic field must be created before the brake opening. All the other involved parameters are common to both motor types and they are those ones concerning the two speed banks (TR1, TR2), the starting and stopping (STC) and those concerning the adjustment of S-curves (RSN).

V0.01 – 04/2013

71

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 10. MANAGEMENT OF ERRORS 10.1. Error Reset The equipment can detect different error situations. To return to normal operation mode, RESET the error. Otherwise, the equipment will remain out of service. There are several possible ways to carry out an error RESET: a) By turning off and on again the equipment. b) By pressing the red button P/R in the console. c) By entering in SETUP mode and coming back to RUN mode. d) By the AUTORESET function. e) By running an external Reset. The RESET of an error is possible only when the originating cause disappeared.

10.1.1 Autoreset Function that automatically carries out a maximum number of RESETs in 3 minutes. During this period, if as many errors as the maximum number set out (figure entered in parameter CNF.02 right digit) appear, the equipment will remain out of service until an error RESET is carried out by any other mean. Every time the equipment is turned off and on, or we enter or exit the PROGRAM mode, the internal counter of number of errors within 3 minutes will switch to 0; i.e., as many errors as the maximum number set to parameter CNF.02’s right digit value will be allowed in the next 3 minutes. The AUTORESET function waits until the error cause disappears to generate (and count) the RESET.

10.1.2 External Reset of an Error (Terminal 19 connector XC2) To have this function activated, let us remind that A3 Amendment function is to be deactivated and, for synchronous motors, in addition to the function of reading of brake microswitches (refer to tables 9.3, 9.4). An error RESET can be carried out through a voltage-free external contact, in terminal nº 19 of the connector XC2. If this external RESET is applied together with the AUTORESET function, the AUTORESET internal counter will never be increased. If the AUTORESET function exceeds the maximum number of allowed errors, the external reset application will not restore the AUTORESET counter to zero. When an external reset is carried out, the display shows a blinking “rESEt”   while it is being applied and the equipment is disabled. This error RESET type is only accepted when no energy is given. Normally, do not use the external ERROR RESET. An abusive use may degrade the installation if the error is serious and occurs repeatedly. The AUTORESET function is secure and reliable.

10.1.3. Exceptions The following groups of errors are exceptions to the above-mentioned: NON-RESETTABLE Errors. Errors. This error group cannot be reset, neither with the AUTORESET function, nor with EXTERNAL RESET. These are the group of error of parameters (Err 0b, Err bx). When it appears for the first time, the equipment will be left into out of service and it will not admit any kind of error RESET, neither AUTORESET nor EXTERNAL RESET. Correct all the possible errors of parameters. Errors with automatic AUTORESET . Regardless of parameter CNF.02 right digit value, the errors belonging to this group are automatically reset. Therefore, as soon as the error cause disappears, it disappears too and the AUTORESET function counter does not increase. They can be referred as infinite or uncountable errors. When an error belonging to this group occurs, the inverter will never be out of service. The errors with automatic AUTORESET are: 0E (uncontrolled opening of contactors), 04 (low voltage), 07 (C1-C2 open), 18 (brake open when it should be closed), 19 (brake closed when it should be open), 5 (incremental/sinusoidal encoder error), 51 (error of absolute position reading). For further information about these errors, refer to the section 10.3 of the present chapter.  Autotuning errors (Ax) and errors of sensors adjustment (dx)  Autotuning (dx).. Regardless of parameter CNF.02 right digit value, these are errors for which the maximum number of errors of the AUTORESET function is 1. Therefore, if only one error appears, it will leave the inverter out of service.

V0.01 – 04/2013

72

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT

3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter Errors associated to A3 amendment . If A3 Amendment function is activated, i.e., if A3A  ≠ 0, the configuration of the behaviour of errors associated to A3 amendment will be determined by the value of parameter A3A.00: • 

A3A.00 = 1: A3 amendment errors with AUTORESET (automatic “reset”).

• 

A3A.00 = 2: A3 amendment non-RESETTABLE errors (manual “reset”).

10.2. Actions for responding to errors When an error appears, the equipment acts as follows: . It immediately cuts off the power supply. . It deactivates the brake relay (KRL3) and the contactors’ output (KRL2). . It displays the error for 1 second6. If the cause originating the error disappears, any RESET way will be able to restore the normal operation of the equipment. The error RESET will not be admitted until the cause has not disappeared. The last 32 errors detected by the inverter can be directly displayed on the console (chapter 7) or by using the PC application Management of Errors (chapter 13, section 13.2).

  There

6

is only one exception: Err 09, overtemperature error. This error remains for one minute, in order to make possible the

device cooling. V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

73

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

10.3. Description of the Errors 10.3.1. General errors COD

AUTOMATIC AUTORESET

MOTOR TYPE

DESCRIPTION Current sensor Error

CAUSE At least one of the current sensors has stopped working properly.

SOLUTION Before every starting, the inverter checks the current sensors. When starting, following check: if the error 01 appears, we will make the The data viewings int r and int S while inverter is stopped

01

NO

The difference between both values might be greater than 50 and/or the absolute value of one of them greater than 100. If this is the case, you should replace the inverter.

Over-current

02

A working situation where the motor instantly consumes a current above the maximum one supplied by the equipment has been detected.

NO

Anyway, if you have any questions or some questions to make, contact MP for support. This error is always a side effect of very serious problems such as: Power cables incorrectly connected, faulty contactor, encoder with occasional failures, too sudden acceleration or deceleration, machine wheels with high inertia ... Find the failure. The repetitive occurrence of this failure may cause the equipment’s destruction. If you cannot solve it, please contact MACPUARSA and describe the failure situation in detail.

High capacitors’ voltage

03

The maximum capacitors’ voltage allowed has been exceeded either in idle state or in operation.

1. Check voltage applied to the equipment. EXCESSIVE VOLTAGE MAY DESTROY EQUIPMENT. IF 400 Vac IS APPLIED TO THE 220Vac EQUIPMENT, IT WILL BE COMPLETELY DESTROYED. 2. Check both the braking resistance connection and that it is in perfect condition (by measuring ohms between its terminals).

NO

When working in regenerative operation (as a generator), capacitors’ voltage increases and voltage is restricted by braking resistance. If the latter is not connected, Err 03 will be displayed.   displayed.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

74

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

COD

AUTOMATIC AUTORESET

MOTOR TYPE

DESCRIPTION

CAUSE

Low capacitors’ voltage

The capacitors’ voltage is below the minimum accepted by the equipment, either in standby or in operation. In rescue mode, low battery voltage.

Minimum capacitor voltage levels: 400 Vac: 500 Vdc Stopped; 450 Vdc Running 230 Vac:  Vac: 250 Vdc Stopped; 220 Vdc Running  Running 

SOLUTION In normal mode: 1. Check voltage applied to the equipment. Insufficient voltage may prevent the equipment from starting. Provisional connection, heavy machinery near the installation, etc. are possible causes for this error. 2. Like error 02, it may be due to third causes: Power cables incorrectly connected, faulty contactor, encoder with occasional failures, too sudden acceleration or deceleration, machine wheels with high inertia ... In rescue mode with 4/5 batteries  batteries  

Minimum battery voltage levels (400 / 230 Vac):   As a whole, 50 Vdc Stopped; 45 Vdc Running 04

YES

For each battery: 12/13 Vdc. If voltage drops below 8 Vdc or raises above 16/17 Vdc, replace the unit immediately.

1. Make sure the batteries have been charging for at least 24 hours. 2. Check overall voltage in all batteries and unit voltage of each of them. 3. Check wiring in inverter’s batteries. 4. Check that, in normal mode, batteries are charging and 60 V CARBAT board/48 V CHARGER work normally. In rescue mode with UPS (WITHOUT batteries)  batteries)  1. Make sure the UPS have been charging for at least 24 hours. 2. Check that the continuous bus voltage (CE-, CE+), in rescue mode is above 300 Vdc (220 rectified Vac). 3. Check the rescue system’s wiring. 4. Check that in, normal mode, UPS is ON and charging.

Motor blocked

There are two main reasons: SYNCHRONOUS Motors:

06

NO

1) The equipment has supplied maximum current for 6 seconds (synchronous and asynchronous).

1. Check that the brake activates and continues activated. Please bear in mind that if the brake microswitch reading is activated and the brake does not activate, error 19 will occur before.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

75

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

COD

AUTOMATIC AUTORESET

MOTOR TYPE

DESCRIPTION

CAUSE

SOLUTION

2) Machine speed is under target speed or zero (only for synchronous if TR0.03  ≠ 0).

2. If the car is overloaded and the lift is not correctly counterweighted, or if the car or counterweight locking has occurred, the inverter cannot start the machine and this error will be displayed. 3. Motor not connected or wrongly connected with, at least, one phase missing. 4. Incorrect parameterising of the inverter. The most common parameters which may cause this error are ENC.00 (pulses per turn) and DRI.03 (number of machine poles). 5. Encoder offset not adjusted. Either the encoder has been replaced or, due to an incorrect encoder to rotor coupling, it has misadjusted. The encoder coupling must be secured/checked and then run autotuning.

 ASYNCHRONOUS  ASYNCHRO NOUS Motors: Motors: 1. Operating in open-loop control. It may be due to parameter INT.01 being excessively low and, on applying an important load to the car, the lift does not start. 2. Operating in closed-loop control. It may have been configured as the closed-loop control and the its encoder is The not connected or inverter is not detecting pulses. equipment will consider speed 0 and apply maximum current. 3. Check that the brake activates correctly. 4. If the car is overloaded and the lift is not correctly counterweighted, if the car or counterweight locking has occurred, the inverter cannot start the machine and this error will be displayed. 5. Incorrect parameterising of the inverter. The most common parameters which may cause this error are ENC.00 (pulses per turn) and DRI.03 (number of machine poles).

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

76

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

COD

07

AUTOMATIC AUTORESET

NO

MOTOR TYPE

DESCRIPTION

CAUSE

SOLUTION

Power terminals C1 – C2 not connected

The terminals C1 and C2 must be shorted (with power cable) as long as the inverter is supplying energy. If it disappears instantly, the error is generated.   generated.

Refer to chapter 5, section 5.2: to know how to make the bridge between C1 - C2 and K1 and K2 contactors. Check the connections.

Short circuit

A short circuit has been detected in the motor output (U, V, W) or in the braking resistance.

Check phases U, V, W from the inverter’s output to the machine’s connection.

A contactor’s power contact may also be damaged.  damaged.  

08

NO Check that braking resistance is in perfect condition by measuring resistance between its terminals. Overtemperature

09

Over-temperature is due to a high rate working situation, with long approach speed sections and high room temperature. This error, unlike the others, remains on display for 1 minute. This is to cool down the inverter.  inverter.  

NO

1. Try to reduce the approach speed section and then operate in closed-loop (consumption is lower). 2. The equipment’s fans may deteriorate (although very unlikely); please observe if, on the inverter supplying energy (lift in motion), the fans remain stopped. If this is the case, replace the equipment. 3. Check that the brake activates correctly.

0E

YES

Uncontrolled contactor opening

Motor not connected 10

During a service execution, the EMERGENCY STOP signal disappeared (terminal no.12); that is to say, contactors K1 and K2 were unexpectedly deactivated.  deactivated. 

There is no charge connected to the frequency inverter output.  output. 

Normally, this error occurs when a contact in the safety chain is unexpectedly activated during a service execution. In MACPUARSA controllers, in inspection operation, the series suddenly activate when a movement is interrupted. This causes error 0E to be displayed after each inspection movement.  movement.   Check power wiring from inverter’s output (U – V- W) to motor terminals.

NO Check that the motor is in perfect condition (by measuring resistance between phases).

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

77

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

COD

AUTOMATIC AUTORESET

MOTOR TYPE

DESCRIPTION Overspeed

CAUSE The motor allowed.

exceeds

the

SOLUTION maximum

speed

 Asynchronous  Asynchron ous moto motors rs:: Maximum speed allowed maximum speed (TR1.00).

is

18%

of

the

Synchronous motors: Two motors: Two algorithms:

11

a) TR0.03 = 0. The same as in synchronous motors. Maximum speed allowed is 18% of the maximum speed (TR1.00).

NO

b) TR0.03 ≠  0. Maximum speed allowed is TR0.03% of the target speed at each moment. It also detects overspeed in reverse.  

It can occur in faulty motors, when there is car overload, in machines with inertia drive ... If the equipment is incorrectly parameterised, this error may also occur. The most common parameters which may cause this error are ENC.00 (pulses per turn) and DRI.03 (number of machine poles). In synchronous motors  motors  with parameter TR0.03 may occur in the following situations:

≠  0,

this error

1) Autotuning has been run with the machine empty. Furthermore, the inverter has been parameterised with the corresponding profile. Run the machine and, after a brief vibration/rumble, error 11 (or 14) will occur. The reason is the machine is empty and the profiles have been created for loaded machines. Once sure that the autotuning process has been completed, place the load and test it. 2) The machine is loaded, a brief vibration/rumble is noticed and error 11 (or 14) occurs. This is normally due to incorrect parameterising of the speed control, filter and/or position control. In this case, use the profile corresponding to this machine.

12

Out of phase. Phase unbalance

NO

V0.01 – 04/2013

Asynchronous only. Not connected to motor. Unbalanced. Should either a wiring failure in any motor phase or severe phase consumption unbalance occur, the error will be displayed.  displayed. 

Check power wiring from inverter’s output (U – V- W) to motor terminals. Check that the motor is in perfect condition (by measuring resistance between phases).  phases).  

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

78

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

COD

AUTOMATIC AUTORESET

MOTOR TYPE

DESCRIPTION Capacitor failure. Instability in capacitors’ voltage

 Asynchronous  Asynchron ous:: NO 13

Synchronous:: Synchronous Inspection: YES Normal : NO

CAUSE

SOLUTION

Capacitor failure or mains voltage low and/or instable at the beginning of a service.

1. In inspection mode, if repeated and continued operations are carried out, Err 13 may be displayed. Wait for 5 to 10 seconds before continuing. Due to contactor activation while power is flowing to the machine, disturbance and instability in capacitor voltage occur. 2. This error, as occurs with error 02, may be due to third causes: Power cables incorrectly connected, faulty contactor, encoder with occasional failures, too sudden acceleration or deceleration, machine wheels with high inertia ... 3. Check that the mains voltage is not too much low. 4. If the problem persists, replace the Electrolytic Capacitors. VERY IMPORTANT : Before replacing the electrolytic capacitors, please ENSURE that the HIGH VOLTAGE LED is totally OFF. If not, there is a risk of electric discharge which may cause death.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

79

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

COD

AUTOMATIC AUTORESET

MOTOR TYPE

DESCRIPTION Reverse overspeed

CAUSE Lift is moving on the opposite direction to the wanted one and faster than expected.

SOLUTION This error can occur in the following situations: 1) If the equipment parameterisation is wrong, this error can appear. The most common parameters that may cause this error are ENC.00 (pulses per revolution) and DRI.03 (poles number of the machine).

14

2) An autotuning has been run when the machine was working with no load hanging from the pulley. In addition, the inverter has been parameterised with the right profile. We make the machine work and, after a short vibration/rumbling, the inverter issues error 11 (or 14).

NO

This is because the machine has no load hanging and the profiles are designed for machines with load hanging. If we are sure that the autotuning has finished successfully, we will hang the load and make the test. 3) The machine has load hanging, after a short vibration/rumbling, the error 14 (or 11) appears. Usually, this is due to a wrong parameterisation of the speed control, the filter and/or the position control. In this case, apply the right profile for this machine. Invalid

The inverter has detected that contactors are

contactor state

closed when it is stopped.

If you get this error, do the following check: 1)  Set the third digit from right of parameter CNF.02 to 1. 2)  Unplug connector XC13 from the inverter.

16

3)  Make the lift run, either in normal mode or MES mode or inspection mode.

NO

If you don’t get any error, you should replace the inverter. In any other case or if you have any question, contact MP for support.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

80

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

COD

AUTOMATIC AUTORESET

MOTOR TYPE

DESCRIPTION

CAUSE

Overvoltage (open loop only)

The inverter has exceeded the voltage limit applied to the motor and the current does not reach the starting current (INT.01).

SOLUTION Possible causes: 1)  Current sensors in bad conditions. If you have the current sensors checking disabled, you can enable it by setting the 4th digit from right of parameter CNF.02 to 0. By doing so, the inverter will check the state of the sensors at starting. Also, while inverter is stopped, you can view the int r and int s data. Their values must be between -50 and +50 and the difference between them must be less than 100. 2)  Starting current too high (INT.01).

17

NO

This parameter value must never exceed the rated current indicated on the machine’s nameplate. Usually, it must be between the 50% and 75% of the rated current, depending on the installation. 3)  Motor not connected. Check there is continuity of phases from the inverter up to the machine. 4)  Motor stator resistance too high. Measure the resistance between the machine phases. Normally, it should not exceed 12 Ohms in induction machines. Contact MP for support.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

81

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

COD

18

AUTOMATIC AUTORESET

MOTOR TYPE

YES

DESCRIPTION

CAUSE

SOLUTION

Brake microswitch Reading error. Brake should be closed and it is opened.

This error occurs when the value of parameter STC.08 is 1 or 2.

Check the proper connection of terminals 11 (common) and 19 of connector XC2. If it is an MP controller, check that the connector XMAQ is properly connected to the machine. The connection of the thermoprobe, the brake power supply and the reading of brake microswitches are in this connector. The activation/deactivation of brake microswitches can be monitored at LED 19 (refer to chapter 3, section 3.3.1.1).

19

20 21 22

Brake microswitch Brake should be opened and it is closed.

YES

Electromagnetic interferences Equipment Reset

This error occurs when the value of parameter STC.08 is 1 or 2.  2. 

Check the proper connection of terminals 11 (common) and 19 of connector XC2. If it is an MP controller, check that the connector XMAQ is properly connected to the machine. The connection of the thermoprobe, the brake power supply and the reading of brake microswitches are in this connector.

Inverter has detected electromagnetic interferences that could cause some kind of malfunction.

The activation/deactivation of brake microswitches can be monitored at LED 19 (refer to chapter 3, section 3.3.1.1). Contact MP for support.

When this error is detected, the inverter will register and display the error and it will reboot itself.

23 A3 amendment error. Interlocking error.

30

The speed governor locking device should be locking the governor and the inverter interprets that it is not.

Error of overspeed governor interlocking.

Check that KRL1 output is deactivated and 19 input activated.

If A3A.00=1, YES If A3A.00=2,

Machine brake(s) not closed.

NO

Check that the governor incorporates the locking coil. If it does, check its power supply.

The machine brake should be deactivated and the inverter is detecting it is activated. Check that KRL3 output is deactivated and 19 input activated.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

82

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

COD

31

AUTOMATIC AUTORESET If A3A.00=1, YES If A3A.00=2,

MOTOR TYPE

DESCRIPTION A3 amendment error. Release error.

CAUSE Error of overspeed governor released

SOLUTION The overspeed governor coil should be releasing the governor, but the inverter understands it is interlocked. Check that deactivated.

KRL1

output

is

activated

and

19

input

is

NO If there is not any problem with the output or with the input, the lift has probably been interlocked.

32

If A3A.00=1, YES If A3A.00=2, NO

A3 amendment error.

Noise at brake state reading. For A3A.01 seconds, the inverter analyses and determines the quality of the brake microswitch signal.

TABLE 10.1

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

83

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter Incompatibility between A3 Amendment function and speed limit function.

A3 Amendment function uses relay KRL1 as output for the activation of overspeed governor the interlocking device. On the other hand, the speed limit function uses the same KRL1 relay as output.

There are two possible cases: 1)  If installation DOES HAVE A3 amendment, A3A.00=1 (automatic reset) or A3A.01=2 (manual reset) and TR0.01=0.00 (speed limit disabled).

b9 Since both functions use the same output device, both functions become mutually exclusive.

2)  If installation DOES NOT HAVE A3 amendment, A3A.00=0 (A3 amendment disabled) and the value of TR0.01 will contain the speed limit that will determine the activation/deactivation of relay KRL1 according to the logic set out by parameter TR0.02.

10.3.3. Encoder Errors COD

AUTOMATIC AUTORESET

MOTOR TYPE

DESCRIPTION   DESCRIPTION Incremental encoder error.

CAUSE   CAUSE If the encoder is an industrial one (2 differential channels with TTL pulses, asynchronous machines, closed-loop control) and a noise has been detected in the reception of pulses. If the encoder is a sinusoidal one (2 differential channels 1Vpp, synchronous machines) and incorrect values have been detected in one or both channels.   channels.

SOLUTION   SOLUTION  ASYNCHRONOUS MOTORS:  ASYNCHRONOUS MOTORS: INDUSTRIAL ENCODER: 1. Make sure the machine’s encoder is correctly connected to the controller’s connector (XENC): channel A (A+, A-), channel B (B+, B-) and power supply (+, -). 2. Check the encoder’s power supply. 3. Check that the encoder’s cable shield is properly connected to ground.

05

YES 4. Check the connector XC6 proper connection: Terminal 1 : Shield Terminal 2 : A+ Terminal 3 : ATerminal Terminal 4 5 :: B+ B5. Make sure that the terminals in connectors XENC and XC6 make contact especially that they do not  “bite” the the plastic. SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS: SINUSOIDAL ENCODER

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

85

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

1. Make sure the machine’s encoder is correctly connected to the controller’s connector. 2. Make sure the control board is plugged in. 3. Check the encoder’s power supply. 4. Check that the encoder’s power supply negative pole is connected to ground. 5. Check that connectors XC6 and XC8 are correctly connected in the inverter as well as the terminals in each of them: XC6 : Terminals 41, 42 XC8 : Terminals 1 (shield), 6 and 7 Make sure the terminal cables make especially that they do not “bite” the plastic.

contact

6. Check the encoder’s adaptor cable electrical continuity. Rotor sliding

Inverter has detected rotor movement while brake is mechanically closed.

First of all, we have to be sure that the value of parameter ENC.00 matches the pulses per revolution of the encoder coupled to the machine. Supposing so, although not common, in inspection or MES mode, the inverter can issue this error if you make travels in rapid succession, with short or no time between them.

50

However, the occurrence of this error in normal mode indicates that there is an anomaly in the brakes of the machine.

YES

This anomaly can be either of electrical type (long time it takes the brake to close) or of mechanical type. Check both. Contact MP for support.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

86

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter Absolute position reading error.

Before starting up and activating contactor’s output, the inverter reads absolute position. If it is incorrect, this error is triggered.

1. Make sure the machine’s encoder is correctly connected to the controller’s connector. 2. Make sure the control board is plugged in. 3. Check the encoder’s power supply. 4. Check that the encoder’s power supply negative pole is connected to ground.

51

5. Check that connectors XC5 and XC7 are correctly connected in the inverter as well as the terminals in each of them:

YES

XC5 (DATA): T1, T2 XC7 (CLOCK): T3, T4 Make

sure

the

terminal

cables

make

contact

especially that they do not “bite” the plastic.

Communication error with absolute encoder.

Any type of error in inverter / absolute encoder communication, other than requesting absolute position triggers this error.

6. Check the encoder’s adaptor cable electrical continuity.   continuity. 1. Make sure the machine’s encoder is correctly connected to the controller’s connector. 2. Make sure the control board is plugged in. 3 Check the encoder’s power supply. 4. Check that the encoder’s power supply negative pole is connected to ground.

52

NO

5. Check that connectors XC5 and XC7 are correctly connected in the inverter as well as the terminals in each of them: XC5 (DATA): T1, T2 XC7 (CLOCK): T3, T4 Make sure the terminal cables make contact especially that they do not “bite” the plastic..

6. Check the encoder’s adaptor cable electrical continuity.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

87

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

53 57

58

NO

NO

Incorrect type of encoder or encoder with an internal error.

The number of pulses per encoder turn does not coincide with ENC.00.

When an autotuning is carried out, the type of inverter is checked and a test on the encoder’s good condition is made. If the inverter is not the correct one or does not pass the test on its good condition, it will display an error code between 53 and 57, both included. When an autotuning is carried out, the number of pulses per encoder turn is checked. If the number does not coincide with that stored in the ENC.00 parameter, this error will be displayed.  displayed. 

1. Write down the model, communication interface and machine’s pulses per encoder turn. 2. Contact MP and supply the information recorded.  recorded. 

Specify the number of pulses per encoder turn and set ENC.00 parameter to this value. In case of doubt, contact MP.  MP. 

TABLE 10.2

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

88

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

10.3.4. Autotuning Errors No autotuning error has the automatic AUTORESET function. Thus, the automatic reset column has been deleted. On the other hand, the autotuning process applies to synchronous motors only, so that the SYNC and ASYNC columns have been deleted as well. The following table displays the errors inherent in the autotuning process. During the execution of this process, the inverter may display both general errors and encoder errors.

COD A0

DESCRIPTION  DESCRIPTION  Interruption of the autotuning process  process  

CAUSE   CAUSE The command RUN is deactivated before ending the autotuning process.  process. 

SOLUTION   SOLUTION If the operator has not cancelled the autotuning process, monitor the RUN signal by using LED 13 in LED bank 1 (refer to section 3.3.1.1, chapter 3). 1. Make sure the machine’s encoder is correctly connected to the controller’s connector. 2. Make sure the control board is plugged in. 3. Check the encoder’s power supply.

A1

Absolute position reading error.

On finishing the autotuning process, the absolute position is read a second time. If there is a problem during the reading, the inverter will display the error.

4. Check that the encoder’s power supply negative pole is connected to earth. 5. Check that connectors XC5 and XC7

are correctly connected in the inverter as well as the terminals in each of them: XC5 (DATA): T1, T2 XC7 (CLOCK): T3, T4 6. Check the encoder’s adaptor cable electrical continuity. 1. Check that the machine is completely without load. A2

A3

Equal initial and final absolute positions.

Parameterising error in absolute encoder adjustment. 

The machine’s pulley remains motionless.

Absolute encoder adjustment parameters not valid.  valid. 

2. Check that the brake opens properly. 3. Check that the encoder is correctly coupled.   coupled. 1. Write down the model, communication interface and machine’s pulses per encoder turn. 2. Contact MP and supply the information recorded.   recorded. 1. Check that the machine is completely without load. 2. Check that the brake opens correctly. 3. Check that the encoder is correctly coupled.

A4

Sinusoidal encoder error.

Incorrect or missing reading of one of the two sinusoidal encoder channels.  channels. 

4. Make sure the machine’s encoder is correctly connected to the controller’s connector. 5. Check that the encoder’s power supply negative pole is connected to ground. 6. Check that connectors XC6 and XC8 are correctly connected in the inverter as well as the terminals in each of them: XC6: Terminals 41, 42 XC8: Terminals 1 (shield), 6 y 7

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

89

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

COD

A5

DESCRIPTION  DESCRIPTION 

Parameterising error encoder adjustment.

in

CAUSE   CAUSE

sinusoidal

Sinusoidal encoder adjustment values not valid.

SOLUTION   SOLUTION Make sure the terminal cables make contact especially that they do not “bite” the plastic. 7. Check the encoder’s adaptor cable electrical continuity.  continuity.  1. Write down the model, communication interface and machine’s pulses per encoder turn. 2. Contact MP and supply the information recorded.   recorded. 1. Check that the machine is completely without load. 2. Check that the brake opens correctly. 3. Check that the encoder is correctly coupled. 4. Make sure the machine’s encoder is correctly connected to the controller’s connector.

A6

Incorrect number of poles.

The number of poles determined by the autotuning process is not correct.

5. Check that the encoder’s power supply negative pole is connected to ground. 6. Check that connectors XC6 and XC8 are correctly connected in the inverter as

well as the terminals in each of them: XC6: Terminals 41, 42 XC8: Terminals 1 (shield), 6 y 7 Make sure the terminal cables make contact especially that they do not “bite” the plastic. 7. Check the encoder’s adaptor cable electrical continuity.

A7

Parameterising adjustment.

error

in

direction

ADJ.09 parameter adjustment value is not correct.

1. Write down the model, communication interface and machine’s pulses per encoder turn. 2. Contact MP and supply the information recorded. 1. Check power wiring from inverter’s output (U – V- W) to motor terminals.

A8

Error in resistance calculation.

Phase-resistance value determined by the inverter is not correct or is out of range.

2. Check that the motor is in perfect condition by measuring resistance between phases. 3. Check current sensors by displaying their values, in idle state, in digital units.

A9

Reserved

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

90

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 1. Check power wiring from inverter’s output (U – V- W) to motor terminals.

AA

Autotuning process exceeded two minutes.

Time-out error.

duration

has

2. Check that the motor is in perfect condition by measuring resistance between phases. 3. Check current sensors by displaying their values, in idle state, in digital units.

62

Incompatibility

between

process and rescue process.

autotuning

An attempt of performing autotuning with the rescue input signal activated has been made.

TABLE 10.3

Autotuning must not be made with either batteries voltage or UPS power supply.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

91

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 10.3.5. Sensor adjustment errors

No autotuning error has automatic AUTORESET; therefore, the automatic RESET column has been deleted. Furthermore, the sensor adjustment process only applies to synchronous motors, therefore SYNC and ASYNCH columns have also been eliminated. The following table displays the errors inherent in the sensor adjustment process. During the execution of this process, the inverter may display both general errors and encoder errors. COD

DESCRIPTION  DESCRIPTION 

CAUSE   CAUSE

SOLUTION   SOLUTION 1. Check power wiring from inverter’s output (U – V- W) to motor terminals.

d0

Time-out error

Process duration minutes.

has

exceeded

three

2. Check that the motor is in perfect condition by measuring resistance between phases. 3. Check current sensors by displaying their values, in idle state, in digital units. 1. Check power wiring from inverter’s output (U – V- W) to motor terminals.

d1

Maximum number of retry attempts exceeded

The five retry attempts determined for adjustment have been exceeded.

2. Check that the motor is in perfect condition by measuring resistance between phases. 3. Check current sensors by displaying their values, in idle state, in digital units.

4. Make sure that the capacitors’ voltage is stable.

d2

Interruption of current sensor adjustment process

The command RUN is deactivated before completing the process.

If the operator has not cancelled the autotuning process, monitor the RUN signal by using LED 13 in LED bank 1 (refer to section 3.3.1.1, chapter 3).  3). 

TABLE 10.4

V0.01 – 04/2013

92

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

11. AJDUSTMENT AND COMMISSIONING OF ASYNCHRONOUS INVERTERS (ASYNC) 11.1. Check of Connections 11.1.1. Inverter a) Filter of contactors’ reading: Check that the connector 11 of the Wago terminal XC13 with special pole is connected to A1 of contactor K1 or K2 and that the connector 12 is connected to A2 of K1 or K2.

PICTURE 11.1 b) Control board connection. We will have to take into account whether the control board is Via Serie type, MicroBasic type or non-MP type. • 

If the control board is VIA SERIE, SERIE, the commands are given through the connector

with flat cable XC10 and  the  the connector XC2 must have NO terminal connected. Important points when checking the connection of the flat cable in connector XC10: - DO NOT CONNECT IN XC11 OF THE INVERTER - The flat cable has to be connected in the connector X3VF of the Via Serie board and its red part has to be on the left side, according to its position in the controller seen from the front. - The flat cable has to be connected in XC10 of the inverter with its red part facing upwards, according to its position in the controller seen from the front. • 

If the control board is MICROBASIC or non-MP non-MP,, the command orders will arrive to the inverter through the voltage-free contacts of the connector XC2. When replacing a 3P inverter by a 6P inverter, follow the instructions given in the document called “3VFMAC-DSP replacement guide”.

V0.01 – 04/2013

93

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter c) Fuses F3/F4. Connector XC12.

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITH 5 BATRERIES AND KG, KUPS CONTACTORS

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITH 4 BATRERIES AND KPW  KPW  CONTACTOR

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

TABLE 11.1

d) Bypass C2/C3.

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITH 5 BATRERIES AND KG, KUPS CONTACTORS

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITH 4 BATRERIES AND KPW CONTACTOR

TABLE 11.2

V0.01 – 04/2013

94

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter e) C1/-CE

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITH 5 BATRERIES AND KG, KUPS CONTACTORS

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITH 4 BATRERIES AND KPW CONTACTOR

TABLE 11.3

V0.01 – 04/2013

95

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter f) Connector XC3.

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITH 5 BATRERIES AND KG, KUPS CONTACTORS

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

20

20

21

21

22

22

23

23

 XC3

PCB 3VFMAC

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITH 4 BATRERIES AND KPW CONTACTOR

DSP

32 33 34 35

 XC4 paso

36 37

especial  

TABLE 11.4 11.1.2. Connection de VK2P weighing system (Optional) The inverter allows the connection of the VK2P weighing system of MP, to avoid roll-back at starting. The female two-pole Wago connector of terminals T1-T2 of RS-485 of the VK2P will be connected to the male Wago connector T1-T2 of the inverter (picture 11.2)

PICTURE 11.2 After connected, the LED RS-485 of the inverter will start blinking (picture 11.3)

PICTURE 11.3 

V0.01 – 04/2013

96

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

11.1.3. Brake The power supply voltage of asynchronous machines’ brake is usually 110 Vdc. For other voltages, contact MP for support. The machine brake is actuated by a rectifying board GRF RECT 01. Terminals 1 and 8 of the brake relay (KRF) will be connected to the terminal 110 Vs and 0 Vs of transformer secondary side

T  M

X  M A   Q

 0   F  1   F  2   V  1   V  2  

 

SCHEMA 11.1

11.1.4. Encoder Check that the connector XC6 is properly and vertically connected in terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 of the inverter male Wago XC6, as shown in picture 11.4. The terminals 6 and 7 of XC6 must remain UNCONNECTED .

PICTURE 11.4

V0.01 – 04/2013

97

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

The encoder connection to the controller will be carried out through the six-pole female Wago connector XENC, according to the specifications shown in the below schema table.

SCHEMA 11.2

It is very important to fix the encoder shield to the cabinet plate with a flange, as shown in the below picture.

PICTURE 11.5  

V0.01 – 04/2013

98

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

11.2. Initial Check of Parameters Once the inverter connections have been checked, we will start verifying/checking the parameters included in the following table: Param CNF.00

Description Type of control

ENC.00

Encoder pulses

E X

V X

X

DRI.03

Number of machine poles X

PEC.00

Switching frequency

PEC.01

Type of modulation E: V:

X

X

X

X

Value 0: Open-loop control (WITHOUT ENCODER) 1 : Closed-loop control (WITH ENCODER) We will have to set ENC.00 to the number of pulses per revolution of the encoder coupled to the motor. It is very important to be sure of this value. A wrong value in this parameter may cause the car overspeed. It has to be done at this moment in order to proceed with the encoder check later on. We will have to set DRI.03 to the number of motor poles. Usually, its value is 4 which is the default value for this parameter. However, if you want to be sure, we recommend referring to the nameplate machine. Where possible, due to the electrical noise, it will be set to 10.0 KHz. We will set the type de modulation to 0 (triangular).

Open-loop Closed-loop

TABLE 11.5 11.3. Check of encoder, current sensors and run direction  direction  

We will carry out the following actions: 1. Set the type of control in open-loop (CNF.00 = 0). 2. Set the control board in inspection mode. 3. Press the upwards (or downwards) button of the inspection command. If it runs up (or down), i.e., if the movement direction is the reverse of the commanded one, there is a problem machine phases’ order. In this situation, we will have to: a) Switch off the inverter (for safety), and, in the mains connection cable from the machine to the controller, make the exchange of U and V phases. b) Switch on the inverter and retry to press upwards (or downwards) button.

If the inverter is going to run in open-loop (WITHOUT ENCODER), go to point 10 (end of the  process). 4. Activate the test mode (CNF.05 = 1). 5. With the inverter stopped, we can see: 󰂷 Or, tESt , blinking every two seconds. After it is seen three times, we determine that, for the moment, everything is correct. 󰂷 Or, tSt01 tSt01 blinking.  blinking. Contact MP. 6. Make an upward travel and another one downward, as the encoder check is possible only when the machine is in movement. 󰂷 If during both travels tSt02 does NOT NOT appear,  appear, at any any point,  point, the encoder is correct. Go to point 8. 󰂷 If at some point during the execution of these travels, tSt02 appears, it is because there is a problem with the encoder. Go to point 7. 7. Deactivate the test mode (CNF.05 = 0) and display the "Encod"   value. The "Encod"  viewing value  is a counter with a range from 0 to 65535. If the value is increasing, when it reaches 65535, it will return to 0, and it will go on increasing. If the value is decreasing, when it reaches 0, it will return to 65535, and it will go on decreasing.

V0.01 – 04/2013

99

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter We have to ensure the following conditions in the following situations: •  Stopped. We will visualize the "Encod" value. We will touch the encoder connector; we will smoothly pull the cables. The value should remain at 0. If not, the encoder connection shall be checked. •  Upwards. The "UEL" visualisation must be a positive value and very close to "FrEC", the "E5" visualisation must be also positive and close to "FrEC" and the value of "Encod" counter shall be decreasing. •  Downwards. La "UEL" visualisation must be a negative value and its absolute value very close to "FrEC", the "E5" visualisation must be also negative and its absolute value close to "FrEC" and the value of "Encod" counter shall be increasing.

If the visualisations "UEL" and "E5" have similar values and opposite sign and “Encod” behaviour is the reverse of the described one when moving upwards or downwards and, when stopped, it remains to 0, we have to exchange C1+ by el C1-, in six-pole female Wago connector XENC of the encoder, and repeat the test. In any other case, there is a problem with the encoder. The most common problems related to the encoder are: - One or more cables of the encoder signal do not contact, because when inserting the cable in the Wago connector, it "bites" the plastic sleeve instead of “biting” the cable. - Confusion in the connection order of the cables in the connector. - Absence of encoder supply. In this case, when moving, the value of "Encod" visualisation remains to 0. Once the required checks have been done, we will reactivate the test mode (CNF05 = 1) and return to point 5. 8. Deactivate the test mode (CNF.05 = 0).

9. ONLY if the lift is going to operate in closed-loop control (using the encoder), restore CNF.00=1. 10. End of the check. 11.4. Adjustment of INT.00 and INT.01  INT.01   1. Set the control type in open-loop (CNF.00 = 0). 2. Determination of the starting current (INT.01).

This step applies only if the inverter is going to run in open-loop mode. If it going to run in closedloop mode, go to point 3. These are the steps to be followed: a) Carry out a downwards service without load from the highest floor. If it is unable to start, we will slowly and gradually increase INT.01 until the starting is achieved. Do not overdo. After reaching this, proceed with next point. b) Carry out a downwards service with load from the highest floor. If it is unable to start, we will slowly and gradually increase INT.01 until the starting is achieved. Do not overdo. 3. Determination of the no-load current (INT.00). In open-loop and closed-loop. Even if the inverter is going to run in open-loop, the parameter INT.00 has to be properly adjusted to let the inverter carry out the proper unbalanced load. The process to be followed is the following: •  Executing long services, we will make the lift operate without load in car.

  magnitude. •  When it is moving at rated speed, read the "int d"  magnitude. •  Make the reading both upwards and downwards. The obtained result in both cases will be quite similar. •  Set INT.00 to the LOWER of the two readings.

4. ONLY if the lift is going to operate in closed-loop control (using the encoder), restore CNF.00=1.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

100

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

11.5. Adjustment of rated speed (TR1.00)  (TR1.00)  According to this documentation, the parameters TR1.00 speeds/frequencies for speed banks 1 and 2, respectively.

and

TR2.00

are

the

rated

Depending on the control type selected through parameter CNF.00 (0: open-loop; 1: closed-loop), these data will be son interpreted like frequencies or speeds, respectively. Let us suppose an inverter configured in closed-loop control, with TR1.00 = 50.00. We give the rated speed command to it. It makes the acceleration curve properly, it reaches the rated speed and, after 1 or 2 seconds, it starts vibrating, vibrations that, depending on the case, can be very strong. Why does it occur? As already mentioned, if the inverter is configured in open-loop control (CNF.00 = 0), the value stored in TR1.00 represents the target electrical frequency of output to motor and, if the inverter is configured in closed-loop control (CNF.00 = 1), TR1.00 is the target mechanical frequency, which is not the electrical frequency of output, due to the inherent sliding to asynchronous machines. Therefore, if the inverter is configured in open-loop, the value we have to record in parameter TR1.00 is the rated frequency in hertz shown in the machine’s nameplate. If the inverter is configured in closed-loop, we have to calculate the following formula:

RPMxPoles No. 120

 

On the machine’s nameplate, the rated revolutions per minute ( RPM ) and the number of poles shall be stated. With these data and applying the following formula, we obtain the maximum value to be recorded in TR1.00 and TR2.00. The formula considers the number of poles, not the pairs of poles.

For instance, letparameter us suppose a machine with 4 poles 1350 rpm in its nameplate. The value to be recorded in this would be:

RPMx RP MxPol Poles es No No..

=

13 1350 50 x 4

120

120

= 45.00  

There is a formula to calculate TR1.00 which is normally used:

 RPM 

1500

 x50 Hz  

Two conditions are required for this formula to be valid: valid: 1) The machine rated frequency must be 50Hz 2) The machine must necessarily have 4 poles. Even if it is not usual, there are machines of 6 poles. In these cases, this formula cannot be used. 11.6. Adjustment of low speed (TR1.01) The steps to be followed are:

- Initial value of TR1.01 (approach speed).  

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

101

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

The initial value of TR1.01 can be taken from the following table: Speed (m/s)  (m/s) 

TR1.01 (Hz)  (Hz) 

0,5

7..8

0,63

6..7

0,8

5..6

1,0

4..5

1,6

3..4

TABLE 11.6 This table is based on experimental results. In most of the cases, with these values, good results have been obtained. Therefore, we are going to use the table to set a first value. However, we can say that the approach speed is obtained on the basis of the linear speed. This one is to be around 10-12 cm/s. For instance, a frequent case: Leo Sassi machine of 1 m/s and regulation frequency of 45 Hz:

10 cm/s x

45 Hz 1 m/s

= 0.10 m/s x

45 Hz 1 m/s

= 4.5 Hz  

If we apply this formula in all the other cases, taking 45/48 Hz as rated speed, we will see that it is the rule to follow.

- Vibrations  When setting the values from the table, it may be that we obtain vibrations in approach. It happens quite often in lifts of 1.6 m/s. We will increase TR1.01 in 0,5 Hz increments until the vibration disappears. 11.7. Adjustment of S-curves The speed  is  is defined as the position change with respect to time - first derivative of position. The  acceleration  is defined as the speed change with respect to time - first derivative of speed or second derivative of position. The jerk  is   is defined as the acceleration change with respect to time - first derivative of acceleration. Our sensitivity is associated to this magnitude, i.e., to the acceleration changes and it can cause an unpleasant sensation to the lift car passengers when starting and stopping. Therefore, in these points (starting and stopping), we have to assign the speed setpoints to the motor in such a way to obtain smooth changes of acceleration. The speed profile obtained this way is called S-curves. In the following figure, we can see the profiles of speed, acceleration and jerk for a linear curve and an S-curve.

V0.01 – 04/2013

102

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

FIGURE 11.1 3VFMAC-DSP 6P supports two types of S-curves: Standard and Sinusoidal. Any of them can be selected through parameter RSN.00 setting: • 

0: Standard

• 

2: Sinusoidal

11.7.1. Standard curves Standard S-curves are exactly the same as the ones present in 3VFMAC1. We begin from a speed linear profile and we smooth the speed slope changes by means of the constants RSN.01, RSN.02, RSN.03, RSN.04.

  RSN.01, RSN.02: Beginning and End of Acceleration; from speed 0 to rated speed.   RSN.03, RSN.04: Beginning and End of deceleration; from rated speed to approach speed.

o o

V0.01 – 04/2013

103

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

FIGURE 11.2  The higher is the value set in parameters RSN.01-RSN.04, the higher is the gentleness in the associated area.

IMPORTANT NOTE : When we use this type of curves, the acceleration time TR1.02  and deceleration time TR1.04  are affected by constants RSN.01-RSN.04. We could say that the set values in TR1.02  and TR1.04  could be the acceleration and deceleration times if parameters RSN.01-RSN.04 were set to 1. As these parameters are being increased, the times of acceleration and deceleration are being increased as well.

FIGURE 11.3 11.7.2. Sinusoidal curves These curves are called sinusoidal because the acceleration and jerk profiles are sinusoidal. A big difference with respect to standard curves, important to bear in mind, is that this type of curves scrupulously observes the times of acceleration (TR1.02) and deceleration (TR1.04), using exactly the time indicated by these parameters, neither more nor less. Therefore, if the set values in these parameters are too low, it can happen that we obtain errors like Err 04  (low voltage of capacitors), Err 02  (over-current) or Err 13 (instable voltage of capacitors). To solve this problem, just increase TR1.02 and/or TR1.04 . The standard curves are also called partial S-curves, as we begin from a linear acceleration and we modify, one by one, the areas of speed slope change by means of constants. The sinusoidal S-curves are also called full S-curves, as the obtained speed curve corresponds to a unique function that depends on the initial speed, final speed and acceleration or deceleration time. It means that 3VFMAC-DSP 6P determines the full curve for these parameters. There is just one issue more to be treated: modification factor for acceleration curve (TR1.03, TR1.05). The modification factor is nothing more and nothing less than a "deformation" of the curve, in such a way that: •  the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end and vice versa, and •  the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the end.

V0.01 – 04/2013

104

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

 value) is 1. The most convenient is to smooth The value that does not "deform" the curve (neutral ( neutral value) the acceleration at low speeds. Therefore, the default value TR1.03 (modification factor for acceleration) is 1.50. 11.7.3. Which curve type do we have to choose? Whenever it is possible, the sinusoidal   S-curve (default value): the obtained jerk is lower than the resulting one from standard curves. 11.7.4. Adjustment process for standard curves in open-loop mode

TR1.02, RSN.01, RSN.02 RSN.02  1. Adjustment of the acceleration curve: TR1.02, The adjustment of the acceleration curve corresponding to the standard curves consists of the adjustment of 3 parameters: •  TR1.02 (acceleration time) •  RSN.01 (constant of acceleration beginning) •  RSN.02 (constant of acceleration end)

These three parameters have to be simultaneously adjusted. Let us remind, as already mentioned in section 11.7.1. Standard curves  curves  of this document that the acceleration final time depends on these 3 parameters, because TR1.02 is affected by the constants RSN.01 and

RSN.02: the higher these constants, the gentler the beginning and the end of the acceleration and the longer the final time invested. The values set in these parameters will be a compromise between the required comfort during the acceleration curve and the final time invested in the acceleration. The default values for these parameters are TR1.02=2.50s, RSN.01=50, RSN.02=50.

2. Adjustment of the deceleration curve: TR1.04, RSN.03, RSN.04 RSN.04  The adjustment of the deceleration curve corresponding to the standard curves consists of the adjustment of 3 parameters: •  TR1.04 (deceleration time) •  RSN.03 (constant of deceleration beginning) •  RSN.04 (constant of deceleration end)

These three parameters have to be simultaneously adjusted. Let us remind, as already mentioned in section 11.7.1. Standard curves  curves  of this document that the acceleration final time depends on these 3 parameters, because TR1.04 is affected by the constants RSN.03 and RSN.04: the higher these constants, the gentler the beginning and the end of the deceleration and the longer the final time invested. Once the approach frequency is reached, it is important it remains stable for a time between 1 and 3 seconds. To do this, we will use the viewing “FrEC” where an "E" must be displayed for more than 1 second and less than 3: - If it is displayed for less than one second, we can: •  Or reduce the deceleration time (TR1.04). We have to do this carefully because a too low value in this parameter can cause Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. We will do this by decreasing 0.20 seconds at a time. •  Or slightly reduce RSN.03 without compromising the comfort at the deceleration beginning, by using decreases of 20 units. •  Or slightly reduce RSN.04 without compromising the comfort at the deceleration end, by using decreases of 20 units at a time.

V0.01 – 04/2013

105

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

- If it is displayed for more than three seconds, we can: •  Or reduce the approach frequency, until a minimum of 4.20 Hz. •  Or increase RSN.04 •  Or increase RSN.03 •  Or increase the deceleration time (TR1.04). We have to do this carefully because a too low value in this parameter can cause Err 02, Err 04 o Err 13. We will do this by decreasing 0.20 seconds at a time.

11.7.5. Adjustment process for standard curves in closed-loop mode 1. Adjustment of the acceleration curve: TR1.02, RSN.01, RSN.02 RSN.02  The adjustment of the deceleration curve corresponding to the standard curves consists of the adjustment of 3 parameters: •  TR1.02 (acceleration time) •  RSN.01 (constant of acceleration beginning) •  RSN.02 (constant of acceleration end)

These three parameters have to be simultaneously adjusted. Let us remind, as already mentioned in section 11.7.1. Standard curves  curves  of this document that the acceleration final time depends on these 3 parameters, because TR1.02 is affected by the constants RSN.01 and

RSN.02: the higher these constants, the gentler the beginning and the end of the acceleration and the longer the final time invested. The values set in these parameters will be a compromise between the required comfort during the acceleration curve and the final time invested in the acceleration. The default values for these parameters are TR1.02=2.50 s, RSN.01=50, RSN.02=50. 2. Adjustment of the deceleration curve: TR1.04, RSN.03, RSN.04 RSN.04  The adjustment of the deceleration curve corresponding to the standard curves consists of the adjustment of 3 parameters: • 

TR1.04 (deceleration time)

• 

RSN.03 (constant of deceleration beginning)

• 

RSN.04 (constant of deceleration end)

These three parameters have to be simultaneously adjusted. Let us remind, as already mentioned in section 11.7.1. Standard curves  curves  of this document that the acceleration final time depends on these 3 parameters, because TR1.04 is affected by the constants RSN.03 and RSN.04: the higher these constants, the gentler the beginning and the end of the deceleration and the longer the final time invested. Once the approach frequency is reached, it is important it remains stable for a time between 1 and 3 seconds. To do this, we will use the viewing “FrEC” and, the 1 st  digit from left must display an "E" for more than 1 second and less than 3: - If it is displayed for less than one second, we can: •  Or reduce the deceleration time (TR1.04). We have to do this carefully because a too low value in this parameter can cause Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. We will do this by decreasing 0.20 seconds at a time. •  Or slightly reduce RSN.03 without compromising the comfort at the deceleration beginning, by using decreases of 20 units. •  Or slightly reduce RSN.04 without compromising the comfort at the deceleration end, by using decreases of 20 units at a time. •  Or increase the approach speed, by increases of 0.5 Hz at a time.

V0.01 – 04/2013

106

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

- If it is displayed for more than three seconds, we can: •  Or reduce the approach frequency, until a minimum of 4.20 Hz. •  Or increase RSN.04 •  Or increase RSN.03 •  Or increase the deceleration time (TR1.04).

11.7.6. Adjustment process for sinusoidal curves in open-loop mode 1. Adjustment of the acceleration time: TR1.02  As already mentioned in section 11.7.2. Sinusoidal curves, curves, this type of curves scrupulously observes the times of acceleration set in TR1.02.  TR1.02.  It is not recommended to set values too low in these parameters are, because it may cause errors like Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. We will configure this acceleration time according to the gentleness that we want to give during the acceleration. The default value is 2.50 s. 2. Adjustment of the modification factor for acceleration: TR1.03 

This parameter affects only the profile of the target frequency during the acceleration: •  the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end and vice versa, and •  the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the end.

When we say that it affects only the frequency profile, we mean that it does not affect the acceleration time: it does not increase or decrease it. Its default value is 1.50. 3. Adjustment of the deceleration time: TR1.04  The sinusoidal curves scrupulously observe the times set in TR1.04. A too low value may cause errors like Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. Once the approach frequency is reached, it is important it remains stable for a time between 1 and 3 seconds. To do this, we will use the viewing “FrEC” where the approach frequency must be displayed for more than 1 second and less than 3: - If it is displayed for less than one second, we can:

thethis deceleration to do carefully because a too •  Or lowreduce value in parametertime can(TR1.04). cause ErrWe 02,have Err 04 or this Err 13. We will do this by decreasing 0.20 seconds at a time. •  Or increase the approach frequency, by increases of 0.5 Hz at a time. •  Or both.

- If it is displayed for more than three seconds, we can: •  Or reduce the approach frequency, until a minimum of 4.20 Hz. •  Or increase the deceleration time, by increases of (TR1.04) of 0,20 seconds, until reaching the indicated range.

V0.01 – 04/2013

107

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

for deceleration: TR1.05   4. Adjustment of the modification factor for This parameter affects “only” the profile of the target frequency during the deceleration: •  the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end and vice versa, and •  the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the end.

It affects only the frequency profile. It does not affect the deceleration time: it does not increase or decrease it. Its default value is 1.00.

11.7.7. Adjustment process for sinusoidal curves in closed-loop mode 1. Adjustment of the acceleration time: TR1.02  As already mentioned in section 11.7.2. “Sinusoidal curves” , this type of curves scrupulously observes the acceleration time set in TR1.02. It is not recommended to set too low values in these parameters are, because it may cause errors like Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13.

We will configure this acceleration time according to the gentleness that we want to give during the acceleration. The default value is 2.50 s. 2. Adjustment of the modification factor for acceleration: TR1.03  This parameter affects “only” the profile of the target speed during the acceleration: •  the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end and vice versa, and •  the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the end.

When we say that it affects only the speed profile, we mean that it does not affect the acceleration time: it does not increase or decrease it. Its default value is 1.50. 3. Adjustment of the deceleration time: TR1.04  The sinusoidal curves scrupulously observe the time set in TR1.04. A too low value may cause errors like Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. Once the approach speed is reached, it is important it remains stable for a time between 1 and 3 seconds. To do this, we will use the viewing “FrEC” and, the 1 st  digit from left must display an "E" for more than 1 second and less than: - If it is displayed for less than one second, we can: •  Or reduce the deceleration time (TR1.04). We have to do this carefully because a too low value in this parameter can cause Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. We will do this by decreasing 0.20 seconds at a time. •  Or increase the approach speed, by increases of 0.5 Hz at a time. •  Or both

V0.01 – 04/2013

108

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

- If it is displayed for more than three seconds, we will increase the deceleration time, by increases of (TR1.04) of 0.20 seconds, until reaching the indicated range. 4. Adjustment of the modification factor for deceleration: TR1.05   This parameter affects “only” the profile of the target speed during the deceleration: •  the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end and vice versa, and •  the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the end.

When we say that it affects only the speed profile, we mean that it does not affect the deceleration time: it does not increase or decrease it. Its default value is 1.00. 11.8. Adjustment of levelling 11.8.1. Stopping time (RSN.05)  (RSN.05)  The parameter RSN.05 is the stopping time: i.e., how long it takes to the lift to get from the approach speed to speed 0. Values with milliseconds accuracy can be introduced.

The stopping S-curve is ALWAYS sinusoidal type -with modification factor 1.00, independently of the S-curve type selected (RSN.00 = 0 or RSN.00 = 2). The unique parameterisable datum of the stopping curve is the time. It has been designed like this because, as already mentioned in previous section, the sinusoidal curve jerk is much lower than the standard curve one. 11.8.2. Load compensation (RSN.06) The function of parameter RSN.06 is to compensate "somehow" the load during the stopping. In open-loop operation, this "somehow" consists of setting out as stopping time a factor higher or lower than RSN.05 and setting out as approach speed a factor higher or lower than TR1.01, factor which is determined by the inverter according to the torque exerted by the motor. In closed-loop operation, this "somehow" consists of increasing or decreasing the stopping time according to the torque which is being exerted at that moment. •  The neutral value for this parameter is 100 which is also the default value. Neutral value means that with this value the stopping time will be exactly the one set in RSN.05. •  The higher than 100, the lower the stopping time according to the load. •  The lower than 100, the higher the stopping time according to the load.

11.8.3. Load compensation and levelling adjustment The aim of the levelling adjustment process is not the exact levelling with floor level; the real aim is to achieve a uniform stopping point (always the same) independently of the load, either up or down service. Once this is achieved, the levelling magnets will be moved in order to make the lift stopping point coincide with the floor level. Hereafter, the sequence of the actions to be carried out in order to achieve the levelling adjustment is explained. These actions must be made according to this sequence, because if the order is modified, it will be very difficult to achieve a proper levelling of the lift. The adjustment procedure is different whether the installation is going to operate in open-loop (without encoder) or in closed-loop (with encoder).

V0.01 – 04/2013

109

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 11.8.3.1. Load compensation and levelling adjustment in open-loop (without encoder) 1. Load compensation (RSN.06):  If it is required, here are the steps to follow: a. Set RSN.06 to a value between 130 and 140. b. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D) c. Choose a departure floor in such a way that: - It is located above the destination floor D - It is not the highest floor - There are at least two levels until the destination floor D d. Make a travel from the departure floor A until D, WITHOUT LOAD. e. Make a travel from the departure floor A until D, WITH LOAD. f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out: Gradually increase - if we fall short- or decrease - if we exceed- until achieving the appropriate levelling.

In open-loop, you do not get a perfect levelling (whereas in closed-loop, you get it), so that deviations of +/- 1 cm must be admitted. If it is not achieved, slightly slow down the approach speed TR01.01, but never adjust with lower values than 4.2 Hz. Once RSN.06 or TR1.01 is modified, return to point 1.d. 2. Levelling in up direction and in down direction (Adjustment of RSN.05)   a. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D) b. Choose a departure floor A in such a way that: - It is located above the destination floor D - It is not the highest floor - There are at least two levels until the destination floor D c. Choose a second departure floor B in such a way that: - It is located bellow the destination floor D - It is not the lowest floor - There are at least two levels until the destination floor D d. Make a travel from the upper departure floor A until D, WITHOUT LOAD. e. Make a travel from the lower departure floor B until D, WITHOUT LOAD. f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out: - In the downwards service (d), if we obtain a stopping point higher than the one obtained after the upwards service (e), increase RSN.05 slightly and gradually, by increases of 0.050 seconds (for example: from 0.800 to 0.850). Once RSN.05 is modified, return to point d.

V0.01 – 04/2013

110

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter - In the downwards service (d), if we obtain a stopping point lower than the one obtained after the upwards service (e), decrease RSN.05 slightly and gradually, by decreases of 0,050 seconds (for example: from 0.800 to 0.750). Once RSN.05 is modified, return to point d. - If the levelling point coincides in both cases (d, e), proceed to relocate the level magnets. 3. Relocation of level magnets   Previous adjustments enable to make the lift stop at the same point, with or without load, and in up direction or in down direction. Then, we just have to make that (already uniform) point coincide with the floor level. To do so, duly move the magnets which determine the levelling point at each floor, and correct the existing deviations at every stopping. NOTE: If there is any case where the modification is higher than 5 cm, the points of deceleration beginning (pulse magnets) will have to be modified in order to keep constant the deceleration section and the approach section to floor. Finally, we must check that the distance between the approach magnet and the stopping magnet of the destination floor D selected at 3.a is the same at all the other levels.

11.8.3.2. Load compensation and levelling adjustment in closed loop (with encoder) 1. Adjustment of parameter VEL.10, if required   If the machine makes a throaty noise when stopping, we must set the second digit - from right of parameter VEL.10 to 1. This is to say, assuming that its value is the default one 01000, we will have to set it to the value 01010. This parameter can only be modified with the advanced access code. 2. Load compensation (RSN.06): Optional

 , when operating in closed-loop --with with industrial en encoder coder or with m magnet agnet encoder -, no Normally  there is no need to modify this parameter   , because be cause iin n this mode the lload oad is au tomatically compensated.  If it is required, here are the steps to follow: a. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D) b. Choose a departure floor A in such a way that: - It is located above the destination floor D - It is not the highest floor (superior) - There are at least two levels until the destination floor D c. Make a travel from the upper departure floor A until D, WITHOUT LOAD. e. Make a travel from the lower departure floor B until D, WITHOUT LOAD. f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out: - If the levelling point is the same in both cases (c, d), proceed to next point (3). - Otherwise, increase RSN.06 in increases of 5 units. With the inverter operating in closed loop, never exceed 120.

V0.01 – 04/2013

111

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter Once modified, return to point 2.c. 3. Readjustment of TR1.01: Optional   The aim of the readjustment of TR1.01 is to make a first rough approximation of the distance between the magnetic reader and the magnet, leaving RSN.05 for the fine adjustment. Thus, once adjusted, the value of the stopping time parameter RSN.05 would be neither too high nor too low. In some cases, too high could cause problems in stopping with full load. Too low could cause an abrupt stopping. To carry out this adjustment phase, a person will get on the car roof to take the required measurements. The steps to follow are: a. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D) b. Choose a departure floor A in such a way that: - It is located above the destination floor D - It is not the highest floor - There are at least two levels until the destination floor c. Choose a second departure floor B in such a way that:

- It is located bellow the destination floor D - It is not the lowest floor - There are at least two levels until the destination floor D d. Make a travel from the upper departure floor A until D. Measure the distance from the magnet beginning up to the place where the magnetic reader is, as shown in the figure.

FIGURE 11.4

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

112

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

e. Make a travel from the lower departure floor B until D. Measure the distance from the magnet beginning up to the place where the magnetic reader is, as shown in the figure. Lift running upwards

Level Signal from Magnetic Reader  (i.e. MAC325)

Stopping distance in up direction

FIGURE 11.5 f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out:

 

- If the obtained distance is higher than 5 cm, decrease TR1.01 in 0.5 Hz. After decreasing it, if there are vibrations on approach, restore the last value and proceed to next point (4). Once the modification has been done, proceed to point d. - If the obtained distance is lower than 4 cm, increase TR1.01 in 0.5 Hz. Once the modification has been done, proceed to point d. - If it is about 4 or 5 cm for both runs, proceed to next point (4). 4. Levelling in up direction and in down direction (Adjustment of RSN.05)   a. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D) b. Choose a departure floor A in such a way that: - It is located above the destination floor D - It is not the highest floor - There are at least two levels until the destination floor D c. Choose a second departure floor B in such a way that: - It is located bellow the destination floor D - It is not the lowest floor - There are at least two levels until the destination floor D d. Make a travel from the upper departure floor A until D, WITHOUT LOAD. e. Make a travel from the lower departure floor B until D, WITHOUT LOAD. f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out: - In the downwards service (d), if we obtain a stopping point higher than the one obtained after the upwards service (e), increase RSN.05 slightly and gradually, by increases of 0.050 seconds (for example: from 0.800 to 0.850).

V0.01 – 04/2013

113

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter Once RSN.05 is modified, return to point d. - In the downwards service (d), if we obtain a stopping point lower than the one obtained after the upwards service (e), decrease RSN.05 slightly and gradually, by decreases of 0,050 seconds (for example: from 0.800 to 0.750). Once RSN.05 is modified, return to point d. - If the levelling point coincides in both cases (d, e), proceed to relocate the level magnets. 5. Relocation of level magnets   Previous adjustments enable to make the lift stop at the same point, with or without load, and in up direction or in down direction. Then, we just have to make that (already uniform) point coincide with the floor level. To do so, duly move the magnets which determine the levelling point at each floor, and correct the existing deviations at every stopping. NOTE: If there is any case where the modification is higher than 5 cm, the points of deceleration beginning (pulse magnets) will have to be modified in order to keep constant the deceleration section and the approach section to floor. Finally, we must check that the distance between the approach magnet and the stopping

magnet is the same at every single level. 11.9. Adjustment of short floors 11.9.1. What is a short floor? The notion of "short floor" within the inverter context is different from the notion of "short floor" within the control board context. Here, we talk about "short floor" from the inverter point of view when the rated speed is not achieved during a service. It may occur because: • 

it is a particularly short floor, or

• 

during the service between adjacent floors, the rated speed is not achieved. This is the most common case. It happens in those lifts working at 1.6 m/s or 1.0 m/s, with large acceleration sections.

This circumstance can be appreciated in the value of the viewing "FrEC"   which falls short of reaching the rated speed. 11.9.2. Adjustment aim When configuring a "short floor", the main aim is that the time elapsing at low speed is not excessive, in such a way that the service would take longer than required. In open-loop, to quantify this time, we will observe that the programmed approach frequency (TR1.01) is kept in the viewing "FrEC"   for 2 or 3 seconds. More than 3 seconds is considered excessive. In closed-loop, to quantify this time, we will observe that a fixed "E" on the first digit -from left- is kept in the viewing "FrEC"  for  for 2 or 3 seconds. More than 3 seconds is considered excessive.

11.9.3. How to adjust a short floor? There are two parameters, both in group RSC (Short S-Ramp), to adjust short floors: RSC.00  and RSC.01.

V0.01 – 04/2013

114

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

FIGURE 11.6 When the inverter meets the signal of approach frequency, it will make the following: •  It will go on with the frequency ramp a “ little more” , i.e., it will go on increasing the frequency a “little more” .

- 

- 

For standard S-curves, this “little more”  is   is automatically calculated by the inverter according to the acceleration time and the cut off frequency, in the same way its predecessor, el 3VFMAC1, did it. For sinusoidal S-curves, this “little more” is  quantified by parameter RSC.01. By default, it is set to a value of 50. The longer RSC.01, it will go on increasing the frequency for longer and, therefore, the shorter approach time.

•  After completion of the frequency ramp, it can keep the frequency reached for a certain time which will be calculated from the RSC.00 parameter value:

RSC.00 is the time during which the final frequency of the ramp cut off is going to be kept if the latter was half of the rated frequency. Thus, the higher the frequency at the end of the cut off ramp, the shorter the extension time and vice versa, the lower this frequency, the longer the extension time. Thus, the tendency is always to achieve the set objective: reduce the time at low frequency. The formula is the following one: TR1.00 x RSC.00

 CUT OFF FREC/SPEED    2  

 

For instance: let us suppose that TR1.00 = 50.00 Hz and RSC.00 = 1.000 s. CUT OFF FRECUENCY

Extension  Time Extension Time  

12.5 Hz

2.000 s

25.0 Hz = TR1/2

1.000 s = RSC.00

37.5 Hz

0.667 s

50 Hz

0.500 s

TABLE 11.7 Parameter RSC.00 applies for both types of curves (sinusoidal and standard). Nevertheless, when selecting Sinusoidal S-curves (RSN.00 = 2), it is usually set it to zero (RSC.00 = 0.000), because the adjustment of RSC.01 may normally be enough.

V0.01 – 04/2013

115

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

12. SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS 12.1. Checks of Connections 12.1.1. Inverter a) Filter for contactors’ reading: Check that the connector 11 of the special pole Wago terminal XC13 is connected to A1 of contactor K1 or K2 and that connector 12 is connected to A2 of K1 or K2.

PICTURE 12.1 b) Control board connection. We will have to take into account if the control board is Via Serie, MicroBasic or non-MP.

• 

If the control board is VIA SERIE, SERIE, the commands are given through the connector with flat cable XC10 and the connector XC2 must have NO terminal connected. Important points when checking the connection of the flat cable in connector XC10: - DO NOT CONNECT IN XC11 OF THE INVERTER - The flat cable has to be connected in the connector X3VF of the Via Serie board and its red part has to be on the left side, according to its position in the controller seen from the front. - The flat cable has to be connected in XC10 of the inverter with its red part facing upwards, according to its position in the controller seen from the front.

• 

If the control board is MICROBASIC or non-MP, non-MP , the command orders will arrive to the inverter through the voltage-free contacts of the connector XC2. When replacing a 3P inverter by a 6P inverter, follow the instructions given in the document called “3VFMAC-DSP replacement guide”.

If the reading of brake microswitches is enabled   (refer to section 12.1.2.2), it will come through terminal 19 of connector XC2, for both Via Serie and MicroBasic. Therefore, these are the two cases that can occur when the reading of brake microswitches is enabled: •  • 

If the control board is Via Serie,  Serie,   the connector XC2 will only and exclusively have terminals 11 and 19 wired and connected. If the control board is MICROBASIC or non-MP,   all the terminals must be wired, including, of course, terminal 19.

V0.01 – 04/2013

116

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter c) Fuses F3/F4. Connector XC12

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITH 5 BATTERIES AND CONTACTORS KG, KUPS

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITHOUT BATTERIES (ONLY UPS)

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

TABLE 12.1

d) Bypass C2/C3

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITH 5 BATTERIES AND CONTACTORS KG, KUPS

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITHOUT BATTERIES (ONLY UPS)

TABLE 12.2

V0.01 – 04/2013

117

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter e) C1/-CE

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITH 5 BATTERIES AND CONTACTORS KG, KUPS

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITHOUT BATTERIES (ONLY UPS)

TABLE 12.3

V0.01 – 04/2013

118

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter f) Connector XC3

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITH 5 BATTERIES AND CONTACTORS KG, KUPS

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE WITHOUT BATTERIES (ONLY UPS)

TABLE 12.4 12.1.2. Brake The brakes of synchronous machines are usually activated in two different ways: •  Powerbox

or similar. It provides an activation voltage of 200 Vdc for a short period of time and a

holding voltage of 100 Vdc (schema 12.1). • 

Standard rectifier RECT_01: activation and holding voltages are the same and it provides 200 Vdc (schema 12.2).

In both cases, the power supply of the brake activation device will be 220 Vac. Terminals 1 and 8 of the brake relay (KRF) must be connected to terminal 230 Vp and 0 Vp of the transformer primary side.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

119

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

CONTROL BOARD

ASCENSORES

KRF

K2

13

14 (1) (1)

14

-

~

K1

13

XC2/11

+

~

3

1

400 Vp

0 Vs

3A 230 Vp

8

6

0 Vp

POWERBOX

(2)

4A 110Vs

5A 20 Vs

(2)

TIPO/TYPE:TRM

XC2/19

450 VA

NOT CONNECTED

0 Vs

50/60 Hz

CLASE/CLASS T40/F

 

SCHEMA 12.1

CONTROL BOARD

ASCENSORES

KRF

K2

13

14

󰀭

(1) (1)

14

 

󰁾󰀱

 

󰁾󰀲

K1

13 󰀫

3

1

400 Vp 3A 230 Vp

6

8

0 Vp

4A 110Vs 0 Vs

XC2/11

(2)

RECT_01

5A 20 Vs

(2)

TIPO/TYPE:TRM

XC2/19

450 VA

NOT CONNECTED

0 Vs

50/60 Hz

CLASE/CLASS T40/F

 

SCHEMA 12.2 The schemas show the references (1), associated to the brake-varistor filter, and (2), associated to the reading of brake microswitches. These two issues will be developed in next sections. 12.1.2.1. Brake-varistor filter Due to the electrical features of the brake activation circuit and by the very nature of the brake coil, a brakevaristor filter is required, because of voltage peaks that occur when deactivating the brakes. Its function is to ensure the electrical protection of the controller’s elements against these voltage peaks. The filter MUST be connected to terminals (3) and (4) of the connector XMAQ, at the end connected to the machine,, NEVER at the end connected to the controller. machine

IMPORTANT THE APPROPRIATE VARISTOR-FILTER IS COMPULSORY. OTHERWISE, IT CAN CAUSE THE DESTRUCTION OF THE ELECTRICAL /ELECTRONIC ELEMENTS. Should you have any doubt or need support, contact MP. 12.1.2.2. Brake microswitches The reading of brake microswitches is optional, but highly recommended. If carried out, such a reading will be done only through terminal 19 of connector XC2. As already mentioned in section 12.1.1, if the reading of brake microswitches is enabled, it will be carried out through terminal 19 of connector XC2, for both Via Serie and MicroBasic control boards. Therefore, these are the two cases that can occur when the reading of brake microswitches is enabled: • If the control board is Via Serie,  Serie,   the connector XC2 will only and exclusively have terminals 11 and 19 wired and connected. • If

the control board is MICROBASIC or non-MP,  non-MP,   all the terminals must be wired, including, of course, terminal 19.

V0.01 – 04/2013

120

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

The reading of brake microswitches can be monitored through the state of LED 19. 3VFMAC-DSP 6P can be configured in three different ways, depending on the value of parameter STC.08: 0: Reading of brake microswitches disabled. Function RESET ERROR of terminal 19. 1: Reading of brake microswitches with normally open logic. 2: Reading of brake microswitches with normally closed logic. Synchronous machines are provided with two microswitches, one for each brake disc included in this type of machines. Depending on the model and/or the manufacturer, the brake microswitches can be wired in three different ways: 1) Common signal + NC contact for both brake microswitches. 2) Common signal + NO contact for both brake microswitches. 3) Common signal + NC contact for one of the microswitches + NO contact for the other one.

As pointed out earlier, 3VFMAC-DSP 6P carries out the reading of brake microswitches via a single terminal. Therefore, we will have to wire the microswitches both together, in series or in parallel with the required logic according to which we will set the appropriate value in STC.08. As shown in previous schemas 12.2 and 12.3, terminals 5 and 6 of controller’s connector XMAQ are directly wired to terminals 11 and 12 of connector XC2, respectively.

IMPORTANT NOTE : If the inverter input is connected to the brake microswitches, we must be sure that parameter SCT.08 is appropriately configured. If STC.08 = 0 and the reading is wired to terminal 19, it can

happen that the inverter never starts, even though receiving the RUN command. In this particular case, everything would be solved by disconnecting terminal 19 of XC2. 12.1.3. Encoder The encoder coupled to a synchronous machine is very different from the industrial   encoder coupled to an asynchronous machine. As a matter of fact, they are different devices: an absolute encoder a sinusoidal encoder. The The    absolute encoder provides the inverter a fixed andisdetermined in interface one complete turnthrough with a resolution of 8192 points. The to absolute position reading based on position a physical RS-485 connectors XC5 (DATA  (DATA channel, terminals T1, T2) and XC7 (CLOCK, terminals T3, T4).

PICTURE 12.2 The supported protocol is Endat01, proprietary Heidenhain. Errors associated to the absolute encoder are numbered as err 5x, i.e., 51, 51, etc. The sinusoidal encoder consists of two sinusoidal signals 1V peak to peak displaced in 90º to one another. The number of cycles per turn will be 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 and the value will be stored in parameter ENC.00. The A (A+, A-) channel of the sinusoidal encoder is connected to connector XC8, terminals 42 and 43. The (B+, B-) channel is connected to connector XC6, terminals 6 and 7.

V0.01 – 04/2013

121

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

PICTURE 12.3 The sinusoidal encoder is checked at all times, both at idle state and running, and its associated error is err 05. The encoder shield is connected to terminal 1 of connector XC6. In addition, it is very important to check that

the connection of the power source connector and the one of the adapter cable connector have the same sign: +, red and -, black. Check that the negative pole of the power source is connected to ground, as shown in the here below picture.

PICTURE 12.4

To connect the encoder to the inverter, an adapter cable is required. The encoder adapter cable provides the connection interface between the machine encoder and the inverter.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

122

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

PICTURE 12.5 The end cable of the machine encoder is a male connector DB15 which will be connected to the female DB15 of our adapter cable. The female 3-poles connector “+/-“ will be connected to the power supply source of 5 Vdc. All the other connectors will be connected to the inverter in the following way: 41, 42: 42: 1(*), 6, 7: 7: T1, T2: T2: T3, T4: T4:

7-poles, 7-poles, 2-poles, 2-poles,

to to to to

XC8 XC6 XC5 XC7

(*) In the first synchronous controllers, the encoder shield was connected to terminal 1 of connector XC6. At

present, the shield connection to this terminal has been removed. Approximately 1 cm of the adapter cable shield remains uncovered and it is fixed to the rear plate of the cabinet by means of screw/washer. The adapter cable pinout is shown in the following table : FEMALE DB15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 HOUSING

INVERTER XC5/T2 XC5/T1 NC POSITIVE (5V) NEGATIVE (GND) NC XC8/41 NC XC7/T3 XC7/T4 NC XC6/6 XC6/7 XC8/42 NC In the past, XC6/1 At present, ground (Rear plate of cabinet)

TABLE 12.5

FIGURE. 12.1

Note: As shown in the figure, the poles numbering of the DB15 female connector, seen from the front, starts Note: As from right to left. Housing means the metal housing of the connector. NC means “Not Connected”.

V0.01 – 04/2013

123

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

12.2. Inverter adjustment 12.2.1. Control system description The figure 12.2 shows, in a general way, the blocks that constitute the inverter control system for a synchronous machine.

FIGURE 12.2 During the starting and stopping, the speed control reference will be set out by the position control. In any other situation, the reference speed will be set out by the module of S-curves.

The position control configuration is carried out through the group POS parameters. The module of S-curves generates constantly the reference speed, plotting out a speed curve based on the TR1 group of parameters for the bank number 1 of speeds/acceleration and on the TR2 for the bank number 2 of speeds/acceleration and on the parameter RSN.05 (stopping time). We will have a reference current as output of the speed control. This current has to be filtered, in order to eliminate the typical mechanical resonances of the machine and of the installation. The involved parameters in the filter configuration are INT.09 and PEC.00. Finally, there is a current control. This module output will be the result of the output voltages to the motor in accordance with the reference current. This module parameterisation is one of the functions automatically carried out during the autotuning process. The parameters associated to this module are INT.03, INT.04, INT.05 and INT.06.

V0.01 – 04/2013

124

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 12.2.2. Process general overview In next figure, the procedure is globally shown.

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

FIGURE 12.3

V0.01 – 04/2013

125

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 12.2.3. Sinusoidal encoder check When switching on the inverter, after the starting process, if the inverter display shows err 05, we will have to: - Check that the main board is switched on. - Press the red button (PR) of the inverter - If the error persists, carry out following checks: 1) Check the encoder power supply (5 Vdc). 2) Check that the power supply negative terminal is connected to the ground. 3) Check the proper connection of terminals XC6 and XC8. 4) Check that the wires of the adapter cable going to connectors XC6 and XC8 do not  “bite” the plastic. 5) Check that the cable length going from the machine encoder to the adapter cable is approximately 10 m. 6) Check the electrical continuity of the adapter cable (refer to table 12.5, figure 12.1). After all these checks are done, press the red button (PR) of the inverter. However, if the error 05 persists, contact MP for support.

12.2.4. Initial review of parameters The initial review of parameters will help us to set out baseline values with which a great part of the adjustment will already be done. These are the cases that may occur: 1. If the machine is included in the machine table (refer to section 8.4), we will use parameter DRI.08 to set out the values associated to the machine. 2. If the machine is not included in the machine table but we have its associated profile, the associated values will be set out by hand. These profiles can be consulted at ssp.macpuarsa.es. 3. If we know the parameters of another installation which is properly functioning with the same machine model, we can use those installation parameters. 4. Otherwise, i.e., if the machine is not included in the machine table, we have neither its profile, nor any other installation with the same machine model, we will have to carry out the autotuning process (section 12.2.6). 12.2.5. Absolute encoder check A. CHECK THAT THE ENCODER CABLE IS PROPERLY CONNECTED TO THE MACHINE ENCODER. Some encoders are supplied with a cable of 5 to 10 m, ending in a male DB15. Other encoders are provided with a cable of 10 cm, ending in a 12-poles M23 male connector. A cable of 5 to 10 m M23, female at an end and male DB15 at the other end is connected to this connector. checked. In this case, the proper connection of 12-poles M23 male-female connectors must be B. CHECK THE PROPER CONNECTION OF THE ADAPTER CABLE, ON THE ONE HAND, TO THE CABLE COMING OUT FROM THE ENCODER (TERMINAL DB15) AND, ON THE OTHER HAND, TO THE INVERTER TERMINALS (XC8, XC6, XC5 AND XC7); CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE AS WELL. C. CHECK THAT THE MAIN BOARD IS SWITCHED ON. The input voltage of the encoder power supply source comes from the main board. Therefore, if the main board is switched off, the error of absolute or sinusoidal encoder will be displayed. - If error 52 (or 51 at starting) occurs: 1) Check the proper connection of connectors XC5 and XC7 in the inverter. 2) Check that the Wago connectors do not “bite” the plastic. 3) Check the proper connection of the adapter cable to terminal DB15 of the encoder cable.

V0.01 – 04/2013

126

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 4) Check the electrical continuity of the adapter cable (refer to table 12.5, figure 12.1) 5) Check that the encoder supports the Endat protocol, as shown in the picture.

PICTURE 12.6 Press the red button (PR) of the inverter, twice in case of error 52, once in case of error 51. If

the error persists, contact MP. - If error 58 occurs, there is discrepancy between the number of encoder turns and the inverter parameterisation. Contact MP Staff. - If an error between 53 and 57 occurs, the encoder is not right, maybe because internal errors are recorded or maybe because it is not the appropriate type. However, contact MP Staff. 12.2.6. Autotuning  Autotuning  The autotuning process applies only to synchronous motors. motors. The fundamental premise in order to run the autotuning process is that it must be carried out with no load hanging from the machine pulley. pulley. Therefore, the process execution requires the car and the counterweight to be hanged, and the cables removed from the pulley.

VERY IMPORTANT THE  AUTOTUNING PROCESS’ EXECUTION IS MANDATORY IF  AT   AT LEAST ONE OF THESE TWO CONDITIONS IS MET: 1) THE MACHINE PROFILE IS NOT AVAILABLE. 2) IF THE ENCODER COUPLING HAS BEEN SOMEHOW MODIFIED.

Autotuning not only carries out the pole adjustment or zero adjustment. All the performed adjustments during the process are: 1. 1.   2. 2.   3. 3.   4. 4.   5. 5.   6. 6.   7. 7.  

Pole adjustment or zero adjustment. Configuration of the current control. Determination of the motor equivalent circuit. Adjustment values of the sinusoidal encoder. Determination of the number of poles. Determination of the number of pulses per encoder turn. Adjustment of motor direction/phases. The “Adjustment of motor direction/phases” involves  “reconciling”  “reconci ling” the absolute absolute encoder direction, the sinusoidal encoder and the phase connectio connection n order. Therefore, during the inverter installation, if the phase order is changed or if there were any change in the sinusoidal channels A and/or B, the autotuning process would detect the change and carry out the required adjustments.

Each group of these adjustments involves setting out the values of the parameters associated to each of them, as reflected in the following table:

V0.01 – 04/2013

127

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

FUNCTION Pole adjustment or zero adjustment Configuration of the current control

PARAM ADJ.06 ADJ.07 INT.03 INT.04 INT.05 INT.06

Determination of the motor equivalent circuit (*) Adjustment values of the sinusoidal encoder

Determination of the number of poles Determination of the number of pulses per encoder turn Adjustment of motor

DRI.04 DRI.05 DRI.06 ADJ.03 ADJ.04

DESCRIPTION Absolute encoder’s coupling offset Sinusoidal encoder’s coupling offset Id Current Control Proportional Constant Id Current Control Integral Time Id Current Control Proportional Constant Iq Current Control Integral Constant Resistance Time Constant Inductance A-channel zero B-channel zero

ADJ.05 ADJ.08 DRI.03

Amplitude adjustment Sinusoidal encoder’s peak value Motor number of poles. NOT THE NUMBER OF POLE PAIRS

ENC.00

Number of pulses per encoder turn

ADJ.09[1]

This parameter is used to depict the sinusoidal encoder

direction/phases

ADJ.09[2]

being used. Digit 1 (from the right): Sinusoidal encoder direction. 1: reverses direction; 0: in the opposite case. Digit 2 (from the right): Electrical angle direction. 1: reverses direction; 0: in the opposite case.

TABLE 12.6 In short, the autotuning process' execution generates values of parameters . Therefore, an inverter replacement does not involve the autotuning execution but the value migration of a group of parameters. Let us suppose that in an installation we replace the inverter by another one supplied from our Servicenter. Let us suppose the most common case: motor phases connected in the right order and the encoder channels as well. In this case, by means of the application MPConfig (reading/writing of parameters), we will read the parameters of the “old” inverter and we will write them on the “new” one. Doing so, the new inverter is now ready to operate. Another way to do so would be to record the machine profile by setting its appropriate code in the parameter DRI.08 (refer to section 8.4). The values of parameters DRI.04, DRI.05 and DRI.06 will not be modified. But these parameters ARE JUST FOR INFORMATION and do not have any effect on the machine control. Their values will only be modified as a consequence of the autotuning process' execution.

V0.01 – 04/2013

128

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 12.2.6.1. Parameters before autotuning  autotuning 

From the machine’s nameplate data, we have to set a series of parameters BEFORE the autotuning process' execution, as shown in the next figure.

(*) The parameters relating to the speeds can be deduced from the rated frequency (Fn) or from the RPMs and the number of poles. (**)If the absolute encoder does not support Endat01 and/or the incremental encoder does not consist of two 1Vpp sinusoidal analogue channels, contact MP.

FIGURE 12.4 DRI.07 The DRI.07 DRI.07 is  is directly set to the machine rated current (In) value.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

129

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

TR1, TR2 The parameters associated to the speeds can be obtained from the rated frequency datum of the machine (Fn). If this datum is not available, from the number of poles and the RPMs, the rated frequency (Fn) would be inferred by using the following formula:

F  = n

RPMxPolesNo.   120

The parameters associated to speed according to the rated frequency (Fn) are related in the following table: PARAM TR1.00

DESCRIPTION Rated speed Bank 1

TR1.01

Slow speed Bank 1 Rated speed Bank 2

TR2.00

TR2.01

Slow speed Bank 2

VALUE The maximum value to parameter will be Fn.

be

set

in

this

set

in

this

NEVER EXCEED THIS VALUE. As initial value, 10%Fn The maximum value parameter will be Fn.

to

be

NEVER EXCEED THIS VALUE. As initial value, 10%Fn

TR0.03

Inspection speed

As initial value, 30%Fn

TABLE 12.7

IMPORTANT NOTE: NOTE:

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, NONE OF THE VALUES ASSOCIATED TO SPEED MUST EXCEED THE RATED FREQUENCY.

ENC.01 Finally, parameter ENC.01 ENC.01   must be set to 21, which means absolute encoder that supports Endat01 protocol and sinusoidal incremental encoder with signals of 1Vpp. 12.2.6.2. Process execution  execution  The execution and characterisation of the autotuning process is carried out through parameter TUN.00. To modify/execute this parameter, there is no need to enter with advanced code in SETUP mode. To command the autotuning process' execution, this parameter has to be set to the value 09999. After the process completion and as a result, if no error occurred over the course, we will set the values of a parameter group due to the adjustment and, in addition, the parameter TUN.00 itself will be set to zero. If any error occurs and/or the process is somehow interrupted, NO parameter will be modified. The modified parameters as a result of autotuning (TUN00=09999) are the ones related in table 12.6. Let us remind, as mentioned in previous section, that the autotuning process' execution requires noload hangs from the machine, the car and the counterweight are hanged, and the cables are REMOVED from the machine pulley.

V0.01 – 04/2013

130

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter The autotuning execution consists of the following steps: * STEP 1: 1: Set the control board in inspection or MES mode. * STEP 2: 2: Check that the value of parameter DRI.07 corresponds to the machine rated current. The rated current value must be included on the machine’s nameplate. IMPORTANT NOTE: NOTE:  An erroneous value in this parameter may cause the machine deterioration. If this value is unknown or not available, the autotuning must not be carried out. *  STEP 3: 3: Check of speeds. This is basic for the machine proper functioning after the autotuning execution.

TR1.00: Rated frequency. This datum can also be found on the machine nameplate. TR1.01: Approach frequency. As an initial value, set it to 10% of the rated frequency (TR1.00). TR0.00: Inspection speed. As an initial value, set it to 30% of the rated frequency (TR1.00). * STEP 4: 4: Autotuning activation: Set TUN.00 = 09999. * STEP 5: 5: Exit the SETUP mode. * STEP 6: 6: The console must display, blinking and alternately:

S t A r

t

t u n i n  

* STEP 7: 7: Keep pressing the up or down button of the rescue command or the inspection box. Along the process, the following message will appear, blinking:

t U n X X

 

where XX represents the percentage of the completed process.

The process will take between 30 and 45 seconds, during which time the machine is, first, idle and then moves from left to right and vice versa. * STEP 8: 8: If the process is completed without errors, the console will display, blinking:

S A V i

n

  This is the moment when the parameter values obtained from the autotuning process are being recorded. IMPORTANT: ON THIS POINT, WE MUST KEEP ON PRESSING THE UP OR DOWN BUTTON.  * STEP 9: At the end, the console will display, blinking and alternately:  alternately: 

t U n i n

E n d

IMPORTANT : THIS IS THE MOMENT, NEVER BEFORE, WHEN WE CAN STOP PRESSING THE

UP OR DOWN BUTTON, AS THE PROCESS HAS BEEN COMPLETED. * STEP 10: 10: Stop pressing the up or down button. * STEP 11: Additional 11: Additional actions. Process end. If the process has been completed without errors, the parameter TUN.00 will be automatically set to zero by the inverter. Therefore, the inverter would stop to be in autotuning mode and we could proceed to the next point.

V0.01 – 04/2013

131

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

If during the process execution an error occurs, this error will appear and it will leave the inverter in permanent out of service and ABSOLUTELY NO parameter will be modified, even TUN.00 which is set to the value 09999. We must determinate the error cause, solve it and carry out once more this process from the beginning. Errors associated to the autotuning process are related in section 10.3.4. Autotuning errors  errors  of the present manual.  manual.  12.2.7 12.2.7.. Adjustment of speed control and current filter IMPORTANT NOTE: Before proceeding with the adjustment of the speed control and the current filter, we must be 100% sure that the previous autotuning process, if it has been carried out, is successfully completed and without any error. Once we are sure about this, we must carry out the following protocol: 1) Ensure that parameter TR0.03 = 10. 2) Hang the car and the counterweight. It makes no sense to adjust the speed and position controls at this point, as these settings change from being with no load or with load. 3) Check the initial values of the parameters associated to the speed control and the current filter. There are three possible cases:

a) The inverter is pre parameterised. These are cases in which the inverter is part of a complete lift order and the autotuning execution is not indicated as compulsory (TUN.00 = 0). Another possibility is that the inverter has been specifically supplied for this installation, as a result of a claim inquiry. In this case, proceed to following point. b) The inverter is not pre-parameterised. These are cases in which even if the inverter is part of a complete lift order, the autotuning execution is indicated as compulsory. Also in those cases in which the inverter comes from another installation or from the own customer warehouse or from the branch or if it has been supplied from Servicenter or from the factory with a generic parameterisation. In these cases, if we have the profile associated to the machine/installation or the inverter parameterisation of another identical installation/machine that works properly, we will set the parameters according to this document or to this configuration. If the profile associated to the machine does not exist, the default values of these parameters will be used as initial values. These values can be consulted in the parameter table of the synchronous version (section 8.4). c) We do not know whether it is pre-parameterised or not. In this case, contact MP for support or use the default values of these parameters as initial values (section 8.4). 4) Move the car in inspection or rescue mode. If a speed error appears (11, 06 or 14) 7 while starting, we must set following parameters to following values: a) POS.01 = 200 (usually, to 250 or 300). b) VEL.00 = 15000 (usually to 20000). If the problem persists, decrease VEL.00 up to 10000, never more than this. 5) If the problem persists, check that INT.09 = 2 and make the test with the following values of PEC.00: 12.0 Khz, 14.0 Khz and 10.0 KHz. What we are doing at this point is to configure the current filter (refer to Figure 12.2), by varying its cut off frequency. This filter aim is eliminate the mechanical resonance frequencies. But we must bear in mind that these frequencies are inherent to the complete lift: machine, guide rails, car, counterweight, pulleys, etc. 7

 For versions 612 and higher, unlike previous versions, there are three errors associated to speed:

Error 06: Motor blocked: The machine is lower than the target speed. Error 11: Overspeed/runaway: The machine is higher than the target speed. •  Error 14: Overspeed in reverse: the machine moves in the opposite direction to the target direction. • 

• 

V0.01 – 04/2013

132

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter Therefore, even if we know the machine profile, the latter can slightly vary depending on how the assembly has been made. Why is it adjusted by varying INT.09 and PEC.00? On one hand, by setting INT.09, we configure the filter for a PEC.00 of 12.0 KHz. If we increase PEC.00, we are also proportionally increasing the cut off frequency. If we decrease it lower than 12.0 KHz, we are also proportionally decreasing the cut off frequency. 6) If the speed error persists (11, 06 or 14) while starting, we must know if it is caused by a machine vibration or a movement’s wrong direction or an overspeed in reverse (due to a short circuit or any phase disconnection). Therefore, we can cancel the speed error and just let the overspeed error on the rated speed (TR0.03 = 0), then make the test in inspection or rescue mode. Do not forget to restore this parameter to its initial value (10). 7) If in point 6 we determine that it is due to vibrations, decrease VEL.01 and VEL.03 up to 15000 and, if the problem persists, up to 10000, never lower than this. If it is due to a movement’s wrong direction or an overspeed in reverse, check the connection of the machine phases.

12.2.8.. Check of the run direction 12.2.8 The run direction depends on three factors: 1. 1.   Connection of sinusoidal encoder 2. 2.   Connection motor phases

3. 3.   Location of the machine into the shaft: right or left. In MP inverter/machine sets, the two first factors are fixed at the factory. However, since the inverter can be supplied as a component or as part of a complete lift, this adjustment must be carried out in situ.

IMPORTANT NOTE In this machine type (gearless/synchronous), never change the phases to phases to modify the run direction, like we use to do in induction machines (asynchronous).

To set the proper run direction, the following steps must be carried out: 1. SET THE CONTROL BOARD IN INSPECTION OR MES MODE. 2. PRESS TH UP (OR DOWN) BUTTON. - If it goes downwards (or upwards) respectively, i.e., if it carries out the operation in the opposite direction to commanded one, modify parameter CNF.05: * If CNF.05 = 1, set CNF.05 = 0 * If CNF.05 = 0, set CNF.05 = 1 - Try again to press the up (or down) button.

133

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 12.2.9. Adjustment of S- curves The speed   is defined like the position change with respect to the time - first derivative of the position. The acceleration   is defined like the speed change with respect to the time - first derivative of the speed or second derivative of the position. The  jerk   is defined like the acceleration change with respect to the time - first derivative of the acceleration. Our sensitivity is associated to this magnitude, i.e., to the acceleration changes and this is what may cause an unpleasant sensation to the car lift passengers while starting and stopping. Therefore, these are the points (starting and stopping) where we have to assign the speed commands to the motor in such a way as to achieve smooth changes of acceleration. The speed profile we obtained this way is called S-curves. In the following figure, we can see the profiles of speed, acceleration and jerk for a linear curve and an S-curve.

FIGURE 12.5 3VFMAC-DSP 6P supports two types of S-curve: Standard and Sinusoidal. We can select any of them by means of the parameter RSN.00 setting: • 

0: Standard

• 

2: Sinusoidal

134

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 12.2.9.1. Standard curves Standard S-curves are exactly the same that the ones incorporated in 3VFMAC1. We start from a linear profile of the speed and by means of the constants RSN.01, RSN.02, RSN.03, RSN.04 we smooth the slope changes of the speed.

  RSN.01, RSN.02: Acceleration Beginning and End; from speed 0 up to rated speed.   RSN.03,RSN.04 : Deceleration Beginning and End; from rated speed up to approach speed

o

o

FIGURE 12.6

The higher the number set in parameters RSN.01-RSN.04, the more gentle in the associated zone.

IMPORTANT NOTE : When we use this type of curves, the acceleration time TR1.02  and deceleration time TR1.04 are affected by the constants RSN.01-RSN.04. We could say that the values set in TR1.02  and TR1.04 would be  the acceleration and deceleration times if parameters RSN.01-RSN.04  have the value 1. At the same time that these parameters are being increased, the times of acceleration and deceleration are being increased too.

FIGURE 12.7   12.2.9.2. Sinusoidal curves

These curves are called sinusoidal since the profiles of the acceleration and jerk are sinusoidal. An important difference to bear in mind with respect to standard curves is that this type of curves observes scrupulously the acceleration time (TR1.02) and the deceleration time ( TR1.04), using exactly the time indicated by these parameters, neither more nor less. Therefore, if we set too low values in these parameters, it may happen that we get errors like Err 04 (low voltage of capacitors), Err 02 (over current) or Err 13 (unstable voltage of capacitors). To solve this problem, just increase TR1.02 and/or TR1.04 . Standard curves are said to be partial S-curves, since we start from a linear acceleration and we modify, by means of constants and one by one, the zones of slope speed. Sinusoidal S-curves are said to be complete S-curves, since the obtained speed curve corresponds to a unique function which depends on the initial speed, final speed and time of acceleration or deceleration. That is, 3VFMAC-DSP 6P determine the complete curve for these parameters.

V0.01 – 04/2013

135

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter There is only one point left to be treated: modification factor for acceleration curve ( TR1.03, TR1.05 ). ). The modification factor for acceleration curve is nothing less than a "deformer" of the curve in such a way that: •  the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end and vice versa, and •  the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the end.

The value that does not "deform" the curve (neutral value) is 1.00. The most convenient is to smooth the acceleration at low speeds. Therefore, the default value of TR1.03 (modification factor for acceleration curve) is 1.50. 12.2.9.3. Which type of curve to choose? Whenever it is possible, the sinusoidal   S-curve (default value): The obtained jerk is lower than the one resulting from standard curves. 12.2.9.4. Adjustment process for standard curves

RSN.02  1. Adjustment of the acceleration curve: TR1.02, RSN.01, RSN.02 The adjustment of the acceleration curve corresponding to the standard curves consists of the adjustment of 3 parameters:

•  TR1.02 (acceleration time) •  RSN.01 (constant of acceleration beginning) •  RSN.02 (constant of acceleration end)

These three parameters have to be simultaneously adjusted. Let us remind, as already   of this document that the acceleration final mentioned in section “12.2.9.1. Standard curves”  of time depends on these 3 parameters, because TR1.02 is affected by the constants RSN.01 and RSN.02: the higher these constants, the gentler the beginning and the end of the acceleration and the longer the final time invested. The values set in these parameters will be a compromise between the required comfort during the acceleration curve and the final time invested in the acceleration. The default values for these parameters are TR1.02 = 2.50 s, RSN.01 = 50, RSN.02 = 50. 2. Adjustment of the deceleration curve: TR1.04, RSN.03, RSN.04 RSN.04  The adjustment of the deceleration curve corresponding to the standard curves consists of the adjustment of 3 parameters: •  TR1.04 (deceleration time) •  RSN.03 (constant of deceleration beginning) •  RSN.04 (constant of deceleration end)

These three parameters have to be simultaneously adjusted. Let us remind, as already mentioned in section “12.2.9.2. Standard curves”  of   of this document that the acceleration final time depends on these 3 parameters, because TR1.04 is affected by the constants RSN.03 and RSN.04: the higher these constants, the gentler the beginning and the end of the deceleration and the longer the final time invested. Once the approach speed, is reached, it is important it remains stable for a time between 1 and 2 seconds. To do this, we will use the viewing "FrEC" where the low speed command must be displayed for the indicated time: between 1 and 2 seconds: - If it is displayed for less than one second, we can:

136

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter •  Or reduce the deceleration time (TR1.04). We have to do this carefully because a too low value in this parameter can cause Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. We will do this by decreasing 0.20 seconds at a time. •  Or slightly reduce RSN.03 without compromising the comfort at the deceleration beginning, by using decreases of 20 units. •  Or slightly reduce RSN.04 without compromising the comfort at the deceleration end, by using decreases of 20 units at a time. •  Or increase the approach speed, by increases of 0.5 Hz at a time.

- If it is displayed for more than 2 seconds, we can: •  Or increase RSN.04 •  Or increase RSN.03 •  Or increase the deceleration time (TR1.04).

12.2.9. 12.2.9.5. 5. Adjustment process for sinusoidal curves 1. Adjustment of the acceleration time: TR1.02  As already mentioned in section  section   “12.2.9.2. Sinusoidal curves” , this type of curves scrupulously observes the times of acceleration set in TR1.02. It is not recommended to set too low values in these parameters are, because it may cause

errors like Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. We will configure this acceleration time according to the gentleness that we want to give during the acceleration. The default value is 2.50 s. 2. Adjustment of the modification factor for acceleration: TR1.03  This parameter affects only the profile of the target speed during the acceleration:

•  the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end and vice versa, and •  the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the end.

This parameter affects only the speed profile. It does NOT  affect   affect the acceleration time: it does not increase or decrease it. Its default value is 1.50. 3. Adjustment of the modification factor for deceleration: TR1.04  The sinusoidal curves scrupulously observe the times set in TR1.04. A too low value may cause errors like Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. Once the approach speed is reached it is important it remains stable for a time between 1 and 2 seconds. To do this, we will use the viewing "FrEC" where the low speed command must be displayed for the indicated time: between 1 and 2 seconds: - If it is displayed for less than one second, we can: • 

• 

Or slightly reduce the deceleration time (TR1.04). We have to do this carefully because a too low value in this parameter may cause Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. We will do this by decreasing 0.20 seconds at a time. Or increase the approach speed, by increases of 0.5 Hz at a time.

• 

Or both.

- If it is displayed for more than 2 seconds, we will increase the deceleration time, by increases of (TR1.04) of 0.20 seconds, until reaching the indicated range.

137

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 4. Adjustment of the modification factor for deceleration: TR1.05   This parameter affects “only” the profile of the target speed during the deceleration: •  the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end and vice versa, and •  the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the end.

When we say that it affects only the speed profile, we mean that it does not affect the deceleration time: it does not increase or decrease it. Its default value is 1.00. 12.2.10. Adjustment of levelling 12.2.10.1. Stopping time (RSN.05)  (RSN.05)  The parameter RSN.05 is the stopping time: i.e., how long it takes to the lift to get from the approach speed to speed 0. Values with milliseconds accuracy can be introduced. The stopping S-curve is ALWAYS sinusoidal type -with modification factor 1.00, independently of the S-curve type selected (RSN.00 = 0 or RSN.00 = 2). The unique parameterisable datum of the stopping curve is the time. It has been designed like this because, as already mentioned in previous section, the sinusoidal

curve jerk is much lower than the standard curve one. 12.2.10.2. Levelling adjustment The aim of the levelling adjustment process is not the exact levelling with floor level; the real aim is to achieve a uniform stopping point (always the same) independently of the load, either up or down service. Once this is achieved, the levelling magnets will be moved in order to make the lift stopping point coincide with the floor level. Hereafter, the sequence of the actions to be carried out in order to achieve the levelling adjustment is explained. These actions must be made according to this sequence, because if the order is modified, it will be very difficult to achieve a proper levelling of the lift. The adjustment procedure is different whether the installation is going to operate in open-loop (without encoder) or in closed-loop (with encoder).

138

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

1. Readjustment of TR1.01: Optional   The aim of the readjustment of TR1.01 is to make a first rough approximation of the distance between the magnetic reader and the magnet, leaving RSN.05 for the fine adjustment. Thus, once adjusted, the value of the stopping time parameter RSN.05 would be neither too high nor too low. In some cases, too high could cause problems in stopping with full load. Too low could cause an abrupt stopping. To carry out this adjustment phase, a person will get on the car roof to take the required measurements. The steps to follow are: a. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D) b. Choose a departure floor A in such a way that: - It is located above the destination floor D - It is not the highest floor - There are at least two levels until the destination floor c. Choose a second departure floor B in such a way that:

- It is located bellow the destination floor D - It is not the lowest floor - There are at least two levels until the destination floor D d. Make a travel from the upper departure floor A until D. Measure the distance from the magnet beginning up to the place where the magnetic reader is, as shown in the figure.

FIGURE 12.8 e. Make a travel from the lower departure floor B until D. Measure the distance from the magnet beginning up to the place where the magnetic reader is, as shown in the figure.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

139

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter Lift running upwards

Level Signal from Magnetic Reader  (i.e. MAC325)

Stopping distance in up direction

 

FIGURE 12.9 f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out: - If the obtained distance is higher than 5 cm, decrease TR1.01 in 0.5Hz. After decreasing it, if there are vibrations on approach, restore the last value and proceed to next point (2).

Once the modification has been done, proceed to point d. - If the obtained distance is lower than 4 cm, increase TR1.01 in 0.5 Hz. Once the modification has been done, proceed to point d. - If it is about 4 or 5 cm for both runs, proceed to next point (2). 2. Levelling in up direction and in down direction (Adjustment of RSN.05)   a. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D) b. Choose a departure floor A in such a way that: - It is located above the destination floor D - It is not the highest floor - There are at least two levels until the destination floor c. Choose a second departure floor B in such a way that: - It is located above the destination floor D - It is not the lowest floor - There are at least two levels until the destination floor d. Make a travel from the upper departure floor A until D, WITHOUT LOAD. e. Make a travel from the lower departure floor B until D, WITHOUT LOAD. f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out: - In the downwards service (d), if we obtain a stopping point higher than the one obtained after the upwards service (e), increase RSN.05 slightly and gradually, by increases of 0.050 seconds (for example: from 0.800 to 0.850). Once RSN.05 is modified, return to point.

140

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter - In the downwards service (d), if we obtain a stopping point lower than the one obtained after the upwards service (e), decrease RSN.05 slightly and gradually, by decreases of 0,050 seconds (for example: from 0.800 to 0.750). Return to point d after RSN.05 is modified. - If the levelling point coincides in both cases (d, e), proceed to relocate the level magnets. 3. Relocation of level magnets   Previous adjustments enable to make the lift stop at the same point, with or without load, and in up direction or in down direction. Then, we just have to make that (already uniform) point coincide with the floor level. To do so, duly move the magnets which determine the levelling point at each floor, and correct the existing deviations at every stopping.

NOTE : If there is any case where the modification is higher than 5 cm, the points of deceleration beginning (pulse magnets) will have to be modified in order to keep constant the deceleration section and the approach section to floor. Finally, we must check that the distance between the approach magnet and the stopping magnet is the same at every single level.

12.2.11. Adjustment of short floors 12.2.11. 12.2.11.1. What  What is a short floor? 12.2.11.1. The notion of "short floor" within the inverter context is different from the notion of "short floor" within the control board context. Here, we talk about "short floor" from the inverter point of view when the rated speed is not achieved during a service. It may occur because: • 

it is a particularly short floor, or

• 

during the service between adjacent floors, the rated speed is not achieved either. This is the most common case. It happens in those lifts working at 1.6 m/s or 1.0 m/s, with large acceleration sections.

This circumstance can be appreciated in the value of the viewing "FrEC"   which falls short of reaching the rated speed. 12.2.11.2. Adjustment 12.2.11.2.  Adjustment aim When configuring a "short floor", the main aim is that the time elapsing at low speed is not excessive, in such a way that the service would take longer than required. 12.2.11.3. 12.2.11.3. How  How to adjust a short floor? There are two parameters, both in group RSC (Short S-Ramp), to adjust short floors: RSC.00  and RSC.01.

FIGURE 12.10 

V0.01 – 04/2013

141

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

When the inverter meets the signal of approach frequency, it makes the following: •  It will go on with the frequency ramp a “ little more” , i.e., it will go on increasing the frequency a “little more” .

- For standard S-curves, this “little more” is automatically calculated by the inverter according to the acceleration time and the cut off frequency, in the same way its predecessor, el 3VFMAC1, did it. - For sinusoidal S-curves, this “little more” is  quantified by parameter RSC.01. By default, it is set to a value of 50. The longer RSC.01, it will go on increasing the frequency for longer and, therefore, the shorter approach time. •  After completion of the frequency ramp, it can keep the frequency reached for a certain time

which will be calculated from the RSC.00 parameter value:

RSC.00 is the time during which the final frequency of the ramp cut off is going to be kept if the latter was half of the rated frequency. Thus, the higher the frequency at the end of the cut off ramp, the shorter the extension time and vice versa, the lower this frequency, the longer the extension time. Thus, the tendency is always to achieve the set objective: reduce the time at low frequency. The formula is the following one:

TR1.00 x RSC.00

 CUT OFF FREQ/SPEED    2  

 

For instance: let us suppose that TR1.00 = 20.00 Hz and RSC.00 = 1.000 s. CUT OFF FRECUENCY

Extension  Time Extension Time  

5.00 Hz

2.000 s

10.0 Hz = TR1/2

1.000 s = RSC.00

15.00 Hz

0.667 s

20.00 Hz

0.500 s

TABLE 12.8 Parameter RSC.00 applies for both types of curves (sinusoidal and standard). Nevertheless, when selecting Sinusoidal S-curves (RSN.00 = 2), it is usually set it to zero (RSC.00 = 0.000), because the adjustment of RSC.01 may normally be enough.

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

142

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 12.2.12. Adjustments of position control. Starting and stopping 12.2.12.

Version 613 allows the starting and stopping configuration, in an independent way.  way.  The parameters shown in the following table will be used:

PARAM

DESCRIPTION

RANGE 0 : Deactivated 1: Activated, speed integral in starting and stopping 2: Activated, speed integral only in stopping 3: Activated, no speed integral

POS.00

Position control mode

POS.01

Starting. Proportional Constant

It determines the value of the position control constant proportional

POS.02

Stopping Proportional Constant

It determines the value of the position control constant proportional

TABLE 12.9

To adjust these parameters, the best option would be to make it with the maximum load. However, this case is usually impracticable; therefore, we describe the adjustment made with an empty car.

The adjustment of these parameters is carried out in the following way: • 

In 2:1 installations: the position control mode POS.00 is set to 1 and POS.01 and POS.02 are adjusted with same value. We start with 200 and increase 50 by 50 units until the rollback disappears, both at starting and at stopping. Then, we stop. The tests will be done at departure and arrival at the top level (with empty car). Once the value is determined, we will make the test at the intermediate level and at the lowest one. If the machine makes oscillations or rumble, decrease the value of 50 by 50 units, until this effect disappears. In this type of installations, the values are usually included in a range between 200 and 400.

• 

In 1:1 installations: the position control mode POS.00 00 is set to 2 and POS.01 and POS.02 are adjusted in an independent way. Installations with a 1:1 suspension are more likely to a stroke on the starting; it is more a feeling than an actual vibration, like a fast elastic movement, before the beginning of the travel. To avoid this behaviour, the position control mode POS.00 is set to 2. POS.01 and POS.02 are adjusted in the following way:

POS.01 Position control at starting. We start with from the initial value of 500. We will make the test from the highest floor and increase 50 by 50 units in order to reduce as much as possible the starting jerk when the brake opens. Here, we have to be careful in order to distinguish whether it happens when the brake opens or when the movement begins. It is the first case we are mentioning in this point. Once the value is determined, we will make the test at the intermediate level and at the lowest one. If the machine makes oscillations or rumble, decrease the value of 50 by 50 units.

POS.02 Position control at stopping. We start with 200 and increase 50 by 50 units until the rollback appears when stopping at the highest floor. Once the value is determined, we will make the test at the intermediate level and at the lowest one. If the machine makes oscillations or rumble, decrease the value of 50 by 50 units.

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

143

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 12.2.13. Adjustments of brake

The 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter is basically provided with 4 parameters for the adjustment of the activation/deactivation of the machine brake. These parameters are related in following table:

PARAM STC.08

DESCRIPTION It determines the role of pin 19 in XC2 connector.

STC.00

Delay between brake activation command and start of motor spinning. I.e., time between brake relay activation and brake opening. Time elapsed between brake deactivation and motor power failure at stopping. I.e., time between brake relay activation and brake closing. It determines the time current drop once the brake has been activated.

STC.02

STC.09

TABLE 12.10

RANGE 0: Reset/Error 1: N/Open Brake microswitches reading/activated 2: N/Closed Brake microswitches reading/deactivated 00.01..02.50 s

00.01..02.50 s

0.00..3.00

Synchronous machines (gearless) are usually provided with two brakes coupled to the motor’s rotor where also the machine pulley is directly coupled. Each brake includes a microswitch to enable its state monitoring. To optimize the starting and stopping times, the reading of brake microswitches must be enabled. If you want to comply with A3 Amendment of EN81 or, only meet safety recommendations, just wire the normally closed contacts in series and connect them to terminals 5, 6 of connector XMAQ (schemas 12.1, 12.2). These contacts go straight to the input XC2/19 of the inverter. To enable the reading of the normally closed brake microswitches, we must set parameter STC.08 to 2 (refer to table 12.10) and/or enable the A3 Amendment function (A3A.00 = 1). When connecting the brake microswitches, the inverter console displays “rESEt” blinking, it means that the input XC2/19 is configured with error reset.

12.2.13.1. Opening and closing times. Reading of the machine brake microswitches

Reading of brake microswitches deactivated   (Not recommended. Not in compliance with A3/EN-81 Amendment): STC.08 = 0. When starting, the inverter’s brake relay KRL3 will be activated. After STC.00 seconds are elapsed, the movement will start. When stopping, the inverter’s brake relay KRL3 will be deactivated. After STC.02 seconds are elapsed, the motor power failure will start. The opening and closing times of the brakes depend on the temperature and the input voltage and they can be different each other. If the values of parameters STC.00 and STC.02 are too tight, when the installation conditions (voltage and temperature) change, the inverter may issue errors 18 and 19. If we adjust them taking into account the worst conditions, we will be penalising the starting and stopping times. This is the reason why it is not recommended. The opening (STC.00) and closing (STC.02) times are adjusted in the same way but independently. We will start from value 1.20 s. • 

If no error appears, decrease by 0.20 s at a time until error 18 or 19 appears. The resulting value must be increased in 0.50 s.

• 

• If error 18 or 19 appears, increase the value by 0.20 s at a time until error disappears. The resulting value must be increased in 0.50 s.

144

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

VERY IMPORTANT THIS CONFIGURATION IS NOT IN COMPLIANCE WITH A3 AMENDEMENT OF STANDARD EN81.

Reading of brake microswitches m icroswitches activated: STC.08 = 1, 2 or A3A.00 = 1 (Recommended) When starting, the inverter’s brake relay KRL3 will be activated. The moment it is determined by the reading of brake microswitches that the machine brake is mechanically opened the movement will start. After STC.00 seconds are elapsed if the brake remains closed, error 19 will occur. When stopping, the inverter’s brake relay KRL3 will be deactivated. The moment it is determined by the reading of brake microswitches that the machine brake is mechanically closed, the motor power failure will start. After STC.02 seconds are elapsed if the brake remains opened, error 18 will occur. Therefore, as a general rule, the values of STC.00 and STC.02 must be set to 2.00 s, since the inverter will detect by the reading of brake microswitches at what moment it opened or closed. If there is any problem with the brake and the latter does not open (or close) after two seconds and half, an error of reading of brake microswitches (18, 19) occurs. If any kind of error occurs in the inverter during the stopping, the latter would be abruptly carried out. A classic case could be that the control board opens the contactors due to an opening in the safety chain. Then,

the inverter would issue error 0E. In principle, it would not be a matter of stopping adjustment; so we must analyse the error cause and correct it. If we activate the A3 Amendment (A3A.00 = 1, 2) function, we will be activating reading of normally closed brake microswitches, independently of the value of STC.08.

12.2.13.2. Motor power failure After the machine brake is mechanically closed, the motor power failure starts. If the motor power is abruptly cut off, a “klonk” would be heard and a little jerk would be felt in the car (since the car would not move). Do not confuse this “klonk” and the little jerk sensation with an oscillation and an actual movement of an abrupt stopping caused by an error occurrence (refer to previous section). This “klonk” is due to the small clearance in the machine brake. At stopping, if the machine power is abruptly cut off, the load will cause an abrupt movement in the favourable direction. This effect is neither critical nor problematic, since the brake is already closed. However, this unpleasant sensation can be removed by means of parameter STC.09, whose value is the time, stated in seconds, of the current drop ramp. The default value of this parameter is 1.00 s. To adjust these parameters, the best option would be to make it at the lowest floor with the maximum load. However, this case is usually impracticable; therefore, we describe the adjustment made with an empty car and at the arrival to the highest floor. In short, with the value of parameter STC.09 set to 1.00 s, we distinguish two initial cases: 1. 1.   If the “klonk” is not heard: in this case, it is a matter of decreasing this value until the “klonk” is heard. The resulting value must be increased in 0.20 s. 2. 2.   If the “klonk” is heard: in this case, it is a matter of decreasing this value until the “klonk” is heard. The resulting value must be increased in 0.20 s.

145

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

The Figure 12.11 shows the flow diagram corresponding to the sequence of action to be carried out in order to adjust parameter STC.09.

START

INITIAL VALUE STC.00 = 1.00 s

LANDING AT TOP FLOOR WITH EMPTY CAR

Is there a «klonk» after

NO

brake closes ?

YES

DECREASE

INCREASE

0.10 s

0.10 s

PARAMETER

PARAMETER

STC.09

STC.09 YES

NO

LANDING AT TOP

LANDING AT TOP

FLOOR WITH

FLOOR WITH

EMPTY CAR

EMPTY CAR

Is there a «klonk» after

Is there a «klonk» after

brake closes ?

brake closes ?

YES

NO

INCREASE

INCREASE

0.20 s

0.10 s

PARAMETER

PARAMETER

STC.09

STC.09

FINISH

 

FIGURE 12.11

146

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13. OTHER SPECIAL FUNCTIONS 13.1. Adjustment of sensors 13.1.1. General The adjustment process of current sensors applies both to synchronous and asynchronous motors. This process’ aim is the adjustment of the amplitude of the current V phase in respect to the one of U phase, carried out at the rated current point of output to motor, in such a way the error is lower than 1%. In asynchronous inverters, the output rated current is determined by the inverter type in terms of power/voltage. Refer to table of specifications in section 16 of the present document. In synchronous inverters, the output rated current is determined by parameter DRI.07, whose maximum value corresponds to the rated current of the device in terms of power/voltage. Unlike the autotuning process, the no-load machine is NOT required ; so no need to remove the traction cables of car and counterweight from the machine pulley. 13.1.2. Process execution The process execution of the adjustment of sensors is carried out through parameter TUN.01. To modify/execute this parameter, there is no need to enter SETUP with advanced access code. To command the process execution of the adjustment of sensors, set the parameter TUN.01 to value 00001.

To complete the process and as a result of it, if no error occurred during the course, the adjustment of the V phase current as well as the values of a group of parameters will be set and, in addition, the parameter TUN.01 itself will be set to zero. If any error occurs and/or the process is interrupted in any way, NO parameter will be modified. We must remind, as already mentioned in previous section, that the process execution of the adjustment of sensors does NOT require no-load machine, since it will not even open the brake. The process of the adjustment of sensors consists of following steps: * STEP 1: 1: Set the control board in inspection or MES mode. * STEP 2: 2: Activate the adjustment of sensors: TUN.01 = 00001. * STEP 3: 3: Exit the SETUP mode. * STEP 4: 4: The console will display, blinking and alternately:

S t A r

t

A d J i n  

* STEP 5 5:: Keep on pressing the up or down button of the rescue command or of the inspection box. Along the process the display will show, blinking:

A d J X X

 

where XX represents the adjustment number which is being carried out at every moment. The process will take between 30 and 45 seconds, during which the machine must remain motionless and the brake deactivated.

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

147

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter * STEP 6: 6: If the process is completed without errors, the console will display, blinking:

S A V i

n

  At this moment, the parameters of current adjustment are being recorded.

PRESSING THE UP OR DOWN BUTTON. BUTTON.  IMPORTANT:  AT THIS POINT, WE MUST KEEP ON PRESSING * STEP 7: 7: At the end, the console will display, blinking and alternately:  alternately: 

A d J

i n

E n d  

IMPORTANT : IT IS AT THIS MOMENT WHEN WE CAN STOP PRESSING THE UP OR DOWN

BUTTON, SINCE THE PROCESS IS COMPLETED, NEVER BEFORE. * STEP 8: 8: Stop pressing the up or down button. * STEP 9: Additional 9: Additional actions. Process completed.

If the process has been achieved without errors, parameter TUN.01 will return to zero, and there

will be NO need to touch it up. If any error occurred during the process, the information related to it will be displayed in the console; the inverter will be out of service. In this case, the value of TUN.01 will go on being 00001. 13.1.3. Errors of adjustment of sensors If any error occurred during the process, NONE of the changes in current adjustments would be effective, the corresponding error would be displayed and the inverter state would be permanent out of service. The errors associated to the process of adjustment of sensors are related in following table: CODE

DESCRIPTION Stop caused completion.

D0

Time-out.

D1

Maximum number of retry attempts exceeded.

D2

Interruption of current sensor adjustment process.

POSSIBLE CAUSES by a user before

autotuning

Current sensors (any channel) Connection failure in motor phases/3VF. (any phase disconnected) Wrong departure adjustment. Stop caused by a user before completion.

TABLE 13.2.2 13.2. Test Mode (asynchronous motors only) 13.2.1. General Test mode is a special operation mode in which the inverter informs, via console, about the state of current sensors and encoder. This procedure does not generate errors, it just informs about them when existing. The test mode activation is carried out through parameter TST.00. When this parameter is set to value 1, we are activating the test mode. When it set to value 0, the test mode is deactivated.

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

148

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 13.2.2. Process execution • 

STEP 1: 1: Configure the inverter in open-loop mode: CNF.00 = 0. Otherwise, the results would not be reliable in terms of encoder check. check.  

• 

STEP 2: 2: Activate the test mode: TST.00 = 1.  1.  

• 

STEP 3: 3: Configure the inverter in open-loop mode: CNF.00 = 0. Otherwise, the results would not be reliable in terms of encoder check.  check.  

• 

STEP 4: 4: With the inverter in RUN mode, in idle state, two different texts can appear:  

Option 1: Blinking every two seconds:

t

e

s

t

After this text appears three consecutive times, we can determine that the sensors are correct.

Option 2: Blinking:

t

S

t

0

1

That means that the current sensors of output to motor are defective. The immediate replacement of the device is recommended. During this process execution, if it appears on the console, even once, tSt01, the test of the current sensors will be considered as bad. • 

STEP 5: 5: Make an upward travel and another one downward, since the encoder check can only be achieved with the lift in motion.  motion.   Every two seconds, the following must appear, blinking:

t

e

s

t

We will determine that the encoder reading is right if, during both travels, the console does NEVER display the following blinking message:

t

S

t

0

2

The most common problems associated to the encoder are: - One or more cables of encoder signal do not make contact because, when inserting the cable into the Wago connector, it "bites" the plastic cover and not the cable. - Confusion in the connection order of the connector cables. - Power supply outage of the encoder. Then, the "Encod" viewing value would be 0 in any situation. Once the required checks are made, check again the encoder from the beginning. • 

STEP 6: 6: Deactivate the test mode: TST.00 = 0. If required, in addition, set back to closed-loop operation mode (CNF.00 = 1).

149

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.3. 3VF Rescue Modes 13.3.1. General 3VF RESCUE Modes are special operation modes. They are activated in the event that power supply is interrupted and automatically carried out by the main board and 3VFMAC-DSP 6P. In the event of power supply outage, this process’ aim is to take the car to floor level and open the doors. Then, the process is completed. At the present moment, 3 3VF rescue modes are coexisting: DSP RESCUE 5 BATTERIES DSP RESCUE 4 BATTERIES •  DSP-UPS RESCUE (without batteries) •  • 

Currently manufactured controllers provided with rescue system are supplied with DSP  DSP   rescue-4 batteries or DPS-UPS rescue (without batteries). DSP rescue-5 batteries was the first type of DSP rescue launched on the market and, therefore, 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverters maintains full compatibility, both on software and hardware. The implementation of 3VF Rescue Modes is carried out by a set consisting of the following elements: UPS, switching contactors (if existing), batteries (if existing), wiring, inverter software and control board software. We refer to this element group as rescue system.

Therefore, the control board and 3VFMAC-DSP 6P itself must be specifically prepared for the execution of this special operation mode. The required elements are different according to the involved rescue mode, as detailed in following table.

RESCUE MODE

MOTOR TYPE

DSP RESCUE 5 BATTERIES

DSP RESCUE 4 BATTERIES DSP-UPS RESCUE (WITHOUT BATTERIES)

UPS

BATTERY CHARGER

SWITCHING CONTACTORS

•  (VESTA)

•  (CARBAT 60V)

•  KG, KUPS

• 

• 

• 

(APC)

(CHARGER 48V)

KPW

• 

N/A



(APC)

TABLE 13.1 The DSP rescue with 4 batteries is applied as standard to asynchronous machines. The DSP-UPS rescue without batteries is applied as standard to synchronous machines. In the two modes of DSP  DSP   rescue with batteries (4 or 5), the latter will supply energy to the traction machine and the UPS will supply the main board, the inverter, the machine brake and the door operator. The 3VF rescue is an automatic rescue mode (disregarded) which is activated in the event of power supply outage. In synchronous motors, do not mix up this rescue mode with the rescue system by means of unbalanced load. The rescue system by means of unbalanced load only applies to synchronous motors. It is carried out by the RESMON board and it is provided with a UPS unit for the supply of the brake and the door operator. In synchronous motors, both rescue modes may coexist. 13.3.2. DSP Rescue-5 batteries To check that a 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter is ready for an automatic rescue with 5 batteries, a series of checks must be done at wiring and parameterisation. For the execution of automatic rescue-5 batteries with asynchronous machines, the machine must necessarily be provided with an industrial encoder. Concerning asynchronous machines, remind that they cannot be controlled without an absolute/sinusoidal encoder and the rescue operation is not an exception to this rule.

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

150

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 13.3.2.1. Wiring (synchronous and asynchronous)

To determine that the inverter is ready to carry out an automatic rescue with 5 batteries, we must check the power wiring section and the wiring of the voltage-free input of control signal for the rescue mode activation.

Power stage

Terminals C2 and C3 must be FULLY INSULATED.

If C2 and C3 are not duly insulated, a short circuit may occur, with the attendant risk for the safety. In addition, the device might be irreversibly damaged. C2C3

The remaining connections will be made according to the following table: CONNECT CABLE TERMINAL 3VF With label… Ended with… C3 C3 ring C2 faston +CE / C2 +CE ring C2 ring

F3 and F4 fuse WITHOUT FUSES.

XC12, F3-F4 

holders

must

remain

EMPTY,

Next to them, in the upper part, there is a female Wago connector of 2 poles (XC12). Connect the female 2-pole special connector to the terminals labelled as S1-S2 in XC12 (400 Vac).

TERMINAL 3VF C1, -CE

CONNECT CABLE With label … Ended with…

C1

C1

faston

-CE

-CE (capacitors)

faston/ring

TABLE 13.2

VERY IMPORTANT : ANY ERROR OR FAILURE IN THE DISCRBED CONNECTIONS MAY LEAD TO A SHORTCIRCUIT AND/OR AN ELECTRICAL FAILURE THAT MAY ENDANGER THE SAFETY OF PEOPLE HANDLING THE INVERTER, AND CAUSE AN IRREVERSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE DEVICE.

Control signal There is a signal of voltage-free input through which the main board informs the inverter that the rescue mode is activated. This input is enabled through terminals 20-23 of connector XC3:

V0.01 – 04/2013

151

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

PICTURE 13.1 13.3.2.2. Parameterisation in asynchronous motor version The parameters associated to 3VF rescue the activation and parameterisation in asynchronous motor version are gathered into RES group, as shown in following  following  table: PARAM

NAME

DESCRIPTION

RANGE

VALUE

0: Disabled 1: Enabled automatic rescue mode Specifies the with batteries, WITHOUT detecting activation/deactivation and favourable direction. configuration of the rescue 2: Enabled automatic rescue mode mode with batteries, WITH detecting favourable direction (recommended).   (recommended). 0.10..15.00 Hz

RES.00

Rescue mode

RES.01

Speed rescue in mode

Specifies the speed in rescue mode

RES.02

Starting voltage

Specifies the percentage of 2.0-90.0 % bus voltage at starting

(We the same value recommend like in low setting speed TR1.01, or less).

2

4.00 Hz

60%

TABLE 13.3

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

152

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 13.3.2.3. Parameterisation in synchronous motor version

The parameters associated to 3VF rescue the activation and parameterisation in synchronous motor version are gathered into RES group, as shown in following table: PARAM

NAME

RES.00

Rescue mode

RES.01

Speed in rescue mode

DESCRIPTION

RANGE

0: Disabled 1: 3VF Rescue -5 batteries enabled, WITHOUT detecting favourable direction Specifies the activation/deactivation and 2: 3VF Rescue -5 batteries configuration of the rescue enabled, WITH detecting favourable direction mode (recommended). 3: DSP-UPS Rescue (with batteries). 0.10..15.00 Hz Specifies the speed in rescue mode

(We recommend setting the same value like in low speed TR1.01 or less)

VALUE

2

Acc. to profile Usually, 10% of rated speed

TABLE 13.4 13.3.2.4. Process description In this rescue mode (DSP-5 batteries), there are two switching contactors: KG and KUPS. In normal mode,

KG is closed KUPS is open. In rescue mode, KG is open and KUPS is closed. These contactors can NEVER be closed at the same time. Therefore, they are mechanically interlocked. The sequence would be the following one: 1. Cut off the electrical flow. 2. KG opens and KUPS closes, shifting into rescue mode. At transition, the reset of the control board and the inverter may occur. 3. After about 30 seconds, the rescue travel begins. 4. When reaching the floor level, the control board opens contactors K1 and K2 and the inverter displays error 0E. 5. The control board opens the doors and, after a certain time (control board parameter “Time for Next Service”), it deactivates KUPS. 6. At this moment, if the power supply has been restored, KG closes and we shift to normal mode. Otherwise, the control board would switch off until the electrical flow is restored. During the rescue execution, if the power supply is restored, KG remains open and KUPS remains closed, and the rescue operation is carried out. After the rescue travel completion and when the time specified by the control board is elapsed, the latter deactivates KUPS contactor and closes KG contactor. The batteries, whose charge is controlled by the CARBAT board, provide energy to the machine ONLY; the UPS supplies power to all the other elements involved in rescue operation: control board, inverter, machine brake, door operator, etc. In regard with the inverter, the following scheme describes the rescue process, taking as a reference the information provided by 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter on the console.

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

153

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter START LED “EM” LIGHTS UP

HIGH

Batteries Voltage Check

LOW

OK

NO

WITH DETECTION

RUN Command

YES

WITHOUT DETECTION

OF FAVORABLE DIRECTION ( RES.00 = 2 )

Rescue Mode

OF FAVORABLE DIRECTION ( RES.00 = 1 )

Machine Type

Since the synchronous machines make position control at starting, there’s no need to make the «short» tavels for detection.

In order to find out the favorable favora ble direction, two «short» travels are made in every direction.

ó Upwards or Downwards, the one which demands less energy

ó

+ Input Signal RUN GOES OFF

󰁗󰁨󰁥󰁮 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁬󰁩󰁦󰁴 󰁲󰁥󰁡󰁣󰁨󰁥󰁳 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁬󰁥󰁶󰁥󰁬󰀬 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁣󰁯󰁮󰁴󰁲󰁯󰁬 󰁢󰁯󰁡󰁲󰁤 󰁷󰁩󰁬󰁬 󰁯󰁰󰁥󰁮 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁣󰁯󰁮󰁴󰁡󰁣󰁴󰁯󰁲󰁳 󰁡󰁮󰁤 󰁷󰁩󰁬󰁬 󰁴󰁵󰁲󰁮 󰁯󰁦󰁦 󰁒󰁕󰁎 󰁩󰁮󰁰󰁵󰁴 󰁳󰁩󰁧󰁮󰁡󰁬 󰁯󰁦 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁩󰁮󰁶󰁥󰁲󰁴󰁥󰁲󰀮

󰁆󰁉󰁎󰁉󰁓󰁈

 

FIGURE 13.1

154

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

Two further remarks: 1. During all the rescue process, the rescue signal (XC3-20/23) will remain activated. If the rescue signal input is deactivated during the process execution for more than 3 seconds, the inverter will interrupt the rescue operation. If the signal is reactivated, the process will start from the beginning. beginning . 2. In rescue mode, the only voltage-free input of the main board connector (XC2/XC10) that 3VFMACDSP 6P will consider is the RUN signal (#13), whose activation will determine the moment from which the rescue service will be carried out. The speed will be the rescue speed and the direction will depend on the rescue configuration (WITH or WITHOUT detecting favourable direction). 13.3.3. DSP Rescue-4 batteries To check that a 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter is ready for the automatic rescue with 4 batteries, a series of checks must be done at wiring and parameterisation.

The rescue withmachine 4 batteries applies to asynchronous It is automatic compulsory that the is provided with an industrialmachines. encóder. 13.3.3.1. Wiring To determine that the inverter is ready to carry out an automatic rescue with 4 batteries, we must check the power wiring section and the wiring of the voltage-free input of control signal for the rescue mode activation.

Power stage

The connection points C2 and C3 must be joined by means of a metal plate.

C2C3  C3 

TERMINAL 3VF C3/+CE/C2

CONNECT CABLE With label… Ended with… C2 faston +CE

ring

F3 and F4 fuse holders must remain EMPTY, WITHOUT FUSES.

XC12, F3-F4 

Next to them, in the upper part, there is a female Wago connector of 2 poles (XC12). Connect the female 2-pole special connector terminals labelled as S1-S2 in XC12 (400 Vac).

to

the

In addition to the connections of C1 an negative pole of the capacitors (-CE faston), the rescue negative pole must be connected, also labelled as -CE.

C1,CE

TERMINAL 3VF C1 -CE -CE

CONNECT CABLE With label … Ended with … C1 faston -CE (capacitors) faston/ring -CE (rescue negative pole) ring (fuse nut) ∅ acc. to power 

TABLE 13.5

V0.01 – 04/2013

155

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

VERY IMPORTANT : ANY ERROR OR FAILURE IN THE DISCRBED CONNECTIONS MAY LEAD TO A SHORTCIRCUIT AND/OR AN ELECTRICAL FAILURE THAT MAY ENDANGER THE SAFETY OF PEOPLE HANDLING THE INVERTER, AND CAUSE AN IRREVERSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE DEVICE. Control signal There is a signal of voltage-free input through which the main board informs the inverter that the rescue mode is activated. This input is enabled through terminals 20-23 of connector XC3:

PICTURE 13.2

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

156

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 13.3.3.2. Parameterisation PARAM

NAME

RES.00

Rescue mode

RES.01

Speed in rescue mode

RES.02

Starting voltage

DESCRIPTION

RANGE

0: Disabled Specifies the 1: Enabled, WITHOUT detecting activation/deactivation and favourable direction. configuration of the rescue 2: Enabled, WITH detecting mode favourable direction (recommended).   (recommended). 0.10..15.00 Hz Specifies the speed in (We recommend setting the same rescue mode value like in low speed TR1.01 or less). Specifies the percentage of 2.0-90.0 % bus voltage at starting

VALUE

2

4.00 Hz 60%

TABLE 13.6 13.3.3.3. Process description In this rescue mode (DSP-4 batteries), there is only one switching contactor: KPW. In normal mode, KPW is closed. In rescue mode, KPW is open. This contactor controls the RST inverter’s input. The sequence would be the following one: 1. Cut off the electrical flow.

2. KPW opens, shifting into rescue mode. In this rescue mode, neither the main board nor the inverter is reset. 3. After about 6 seconds, the rescue begins. 4. When reaching the floor level, the control board opens contactors K1 and K2 and the inverter displays error 0E. 5. The control board opens the doors. 6. After a certain time, about 1 minute, the control board leaves the rescue mode and shifts into normal mode. At this moment, two things may happen:   - If there is still no electrical flow, the UPS will switch off and, therefore, the whole controller. - If the electrical flow has been restored, KPW will be reactivated, and the control board will be available to carry out services in normal mode. During the rescue execution, if the power supply is restored, KPW remains open, and the rescue operation is carried out. After the rescue travel completion and 1 minute (point 6) is elapsed, the contactor KPW is reactivated and the rescue mode is exited. The batteries, whose charge is controlled by the CHARGER 48V unit, provide energy to the machine ONLY. The UPS supplies power to all the other elements involved in rescue operation: control board, inverter, machine brake, door operator, etc. In regard with the inverter, the following scheme describes the rescue process, taking as a reference the information provided by 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter on the console.

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

157

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter START

LED “EM” LIGHTS UP

NO

RUN Command

WITH DETECTION OF FAVORABLE DIRECTION ( RES.00 = 2 )

YES

Rescue Mode ?

WITHOUT DETECTION OF FAVORABLE DIRECTION ( RES.00 = 1 )

In order to find out the favorable direction, two «short» travels are made in every direction.

Upwards or Downwards, the one which demands less energy

ó

󰁗󰁨󰁥󰁮 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁬󰁩󰁦󰁴 󰁲󰁥󰁡󰁣󰁨󰁥󰁳 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁬󰁥󰁶󰁥󰁬󰀬 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁣󰁯󰁮󰁴󰁲󰁯󰁬 󰁢󰁯󰁡󰁲󰁤 󰁷󰁩󰁬󰁬 󰁯󰁰󰁥󰁮 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁣󰁯󰁮󰁴󰁡󰁣󰁴󰁯󰁲󰁳 󰁡󰁮󰁤 󰁷󰁩󰁬󰁬 󰁴󰁵󰁲󰁮 󰁯󰁦󰁦 󰁒󰁕󰁎 󰁩󰁮󰁰󰁵󰁴 󰁳󰁩󰁧󰁮󰁡󰁬 󰁯󰁦 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁩󰁮󰁶󰁥󰁲󰁴󰁥󰁲󰀮

LED “EM” GOES OFF

+ Input Signal RUN GOES OFF

FINISH

 

FIGURE 13.2 Two further remarks: 1. During all the rescue process, the rescue signal (XC3-20/23) will remain activated. If the rescue signal input is deactivated during the process execution for more than 3 seconds, the inverter will interrupt the rescue operation. If the signal is reactivated, the process will start from the beginning. beginning . 2. In rescue mode, the only voltage-free input of the main board connector (XC2/XC10) that 3VFMACDSP 6P will consider is the RUN signal (#13), whose activation will determine the moment from which the rescue service will be carried out. The speed will be the rescue speed and the direction will depend on the rescue configuration (WITH or WITHOUT detecting favourable direction).

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

158

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 13.3.4. DSP-UPS Rescue (without batteries)

To check that a 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter is ready for an automatic rescue WITHOUT batteries, a series of checks must be done at wiring and parameterisation.

The DSP-UPS automatic rescue (WITHOUT BATTERIES) applies to synchronous machines . 13.3.4.1. Wiring To check that a 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter is ready for a DSP-UPS rescue WITHOUT BATTERIES, we must check the power wiring section and the wiring of the voltage-free input of control signal for the rescue mode activation.

Power stage

The connection points C2 and C3 must be joined by means of a metal plate. C2C3  C3 

TERMINAL 3VF C3/+CE/C2

CONNECT CABLE With label… Ended with… C2 faston +CE ring

F3 and F4 fuse holders must remain EMPTY, WITHOUT FUSES.

XC12, F3-F4 

Next to them, in the upper part, there is a female Wago connector of 2 poles (XC12). Connect the female 2-pole special connector to the terminals labelled as S1-S2 in XC12 (400 Vac).

ERMINAL 3VF

C1,CE

C1 -CE -CE

CONNECT CABLE With label … Ended with … C1 (∅  according to controller’s power)  double faston Rescue positive pole (∅ 0.4, red)  -CE (capacitors) faston/ring -CE (rescue negative ring (fuse nut) pole)

TABLE 13.7

VERY IMPORTANT : ANY ERROR OR FAILURE IN THE DISCRBED CONNECTIONS MAY LEAD TO A SHORTCIRCUIT AND/OR AN ELECTRICAL FAILURE THAT MAY ENDANGER THE SAFETY OF PEOPLE HANDLING THE INVERTER, AND CAUSE AN IRREVERSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE DEVICE.

V0.01 – 04/2013

159

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

Control signal There is a signal of voltage-free input through which the main board informs the inverter that the rescue mode is activated. This input is enabled through terminals 21-23 of connector XC3:

PICTURE 13.3

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

160

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 13.3.4.2. Parameterisation

PARAM

NAME

RES.00

Rescue mode

RES.01

Speed in rescue mode Acceleration time

RES.03

RES.04

DESCRIPTION

RANGE

VALUE

Specifies the activation/deactivation and configuration of the rescue mode

0: Disabled 1: 3VF Rescue -5 batteries enabled, WITHOUT detecting favourable direction 2: 3VF Rescue -5 batteries enabled, WITH detecting favourable direction (recommended). 3: DSP-UPS Rescue (without batteries).   batteries).

3

Specifies the speed in rescue mode

0.10..20.00 Hz

Acceleration time in rescue mode, stated in seconds. 0.30..10.00 s Only applies to rescue mode without batteries (RES.00 = 3). Final speed of initial speed ramp stated Starting speed 0.01..5.00 Hz in Hertz. Equivalent to parameter ARR.01, but in rescue mode.

Acc. to Profile Acc. to Profile

Acc. to Profile

RES.05

Acceleration time at starting

RES.06

Rated current

Only applies to rescue mode without batteries (RES.00 = 3). Time of initial ramp stated in seconds. 0.10..5.00 s Equivalent to parameter ARR.01, but in rescue mode. Only applies to rescue mode without batteries (RES.00 = 3). With the aim of protecting and guaranteeing the completion of the rescue, maximum output motor current 1.0..4.0 A is limited to twice the amount entered in this parameter.

Acc. to Profile

Acc. to Profile

Equivalent to parameter DRI.07, but in rescue mode.

RES.07

Maximum speed of rescue by unbalanced load

Only applies to rescue mode without b atteries (RES.00 = 3). If, during the completion of a rescue, it shifts to rescue mode by unbalanced load, maximum speed will be limited. If 18% of this value is exceeded, error 11 will occur. 

0.10..20.00 Hz

Acc. to Profile

TABLE 13.8

161

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 13.3.4.3. Process Description

As already mentioned in parameter table of previous section, there are 2 parameters associated to the speed during the rescue and 2 parameters associated to the acceleration time in rescue. When the inverter shifts in rescue mode WITHOUT BATTERIES, the starting process that is launched consists of two straight lines or acceleration ramps: • 

Starting ramp: This first ramp is defined by parameters RES.04 and RES.05. This ramp is equivalent to the starting ramp in normal mode determined by the parameters of ARR group. Its function is to overcome the starting friction.

• 

Acceleration ramp: Determined by parameters RES.01 and RES.03. Its function is to move the car at the required speed in rescue mode.

FIGURE 13.3 At no time is there any mention of curves and, much less, of S curve, but of ramps and straight lines. The rescue operation aim is to take the car to the floor level and open doors. To achieve this aim, the inverter attempts to save the maximum possible energy and the comfort becomes secondary. However, as a general rule, the rescue speed (RES.01) is set at around 12-15 % of the rated speed and the time (RES.03) between 4 and 6 seconds. The final speed of the initial ramp (RES.04) is set at around 10% of the rated speed and the time (RES.05) at about 1-2 seconds. Parameter RES.06 (rated current during the rescue) will be used by the inverter to set the maximum current limit of output to motor during the rescue operation at two times its value. Its value depends neither on the machine nor on the inverter, but on the only power source during the rescue operation: the UPS. Its usual value is 1.5 Amp, which limits the maximum current to the motor at 3 Amp. It is recommended not to modify this parameter. During the DSP-UPS rescue operation, the inverter tries to move the machine according to the speed targets determined by the parameters of initial ramp and rescue ramp in the most favourable direction in terms of energy. Due to the position into the shaft and/or the load inside the car, it may happen that the lift is that unbalanced that the inverter is not able to move the machine according to the target speed with only the power supplied by the UPS, so that the lift real speed exceeds the target speed. Then, and only then, the inverter will operate like the RESMON command: it will short the motor phases. Let us suppose that at this moment one of the motor phases is accidentally disconnected. The circuit would open and the lift would accelerate. When the speed exceeds the value set in parameter RES.07, the error 11 (overspeed) would appear. The parameter RES.07 value is included in all the machines’ profiles. Usually, it is set at 50% de of the rated speed. In this rescue mode (DSP-UPS) THERE ARE NO SWITCHING CONTACTORS. That means less wiring and less EMC noises. The sequence would the following one: 1. Cut off the electrical flow. 2. Shift into rescue mode. In this rescue mode, neither the control board nor the inverter is reset.

162

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 3. After about 3 seconds, the rescue travel begins. 4. When reaching the floor level, the control board opens contactors K1 and K2 and the inverter displays error 0E. 5. The control board opens the doors. 6. After a certain time, about 1 minute, the control board leaves the rescue mode and shifts into normal mode.  mode.  - If there is still no electrical flow, the UPS will switch off and, therefore, all the controller’s elements. - If the electrical flow has been restored, the control board will be available to carry out services in normal mode.

During the rescue execution (at any moment of the sequence), if the power supply is restored, the rescue operation is carried out. After the rescue travel completion and the time determined by the control board and the parameterisation is elapsed, the system shifts into normal mode and it will be available to carry out services in normal mode. The UPS provides energy to the whole installation: machine, control board, inverter, machine brake, door operator. In regard with the inverter, the following scheme describes the rescue process, taking as a reference the information provided by 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter on the console.

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

163

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter START

LED “EM” LIGHTS UP

NO

RUN Command

YES

ó

󰁕󰁰󰁷󰁡󰁲󰁤󰁳 󰁯󰁲 󰁤󰁯󰁷󰁮󰁷󰁡󰁲󰁤󰁳󰀬 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁯󰁮󰁥 󰁳󰁥󰁬󰁥󰁣󰁴󰁥󰁤 󰁡󰁳 󰁦󰁡󰁶󰁯󰁲󰁡󰁢󰁬󰁥

Inverter behaves as the RESMON box

YES

ó

Difference between actual speed and target speed too high

It may happen that, due to the position of the lift in the shaft and/or the car load, the lift is so unbalanced that the inverter cannot make the lift run at the target speed using as power supply just the UPS.

NO

󰁗󰁨󰁥󰁮 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁬󰁩󰁦󰁴 󰁲󰁥󰁡󰁣󰁨󰁥󰁳 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁬󰁥󰁶󰁥󰁬󰀬 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁣󰁯󰁮󰁴󰁲󰁯󰁬 󰁢󰁯󰁡󰁲󰁤 󰁷󰁩󰁬󰁬 󰁯󰁰󰁥󰁮 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁣󰁯󰁮󰁴󰁡󰁣󰁴󰁯󰁲󰁳 󰁡󰁮󰁤 󰁷󰁩󰁬󰁬 󰁴󰁵󰁲󰁮 󰁯󰁦󰁦 󰁒󰁕󰁎 󰁩󰁮󰁰󰁵󰁴 󰁳󰁩󰁧󰁮󰁡󰁬 󰁯󰁦 󰁴󰁨󰁥 󰁩󰁮󰁶󰁥󰁲󰁴󰁥󰁲󰀮

+ Input Signal RUN GOES OFF

LED “EM” GOES OFF

FINISH

 

FIGURE 13.4 Two further remarks: 1. During all the rescue process, the rescue signal (XC3-21/23) will remain activated. If the rescue signal input is deactivated during the process execution for more than 3 seconds, the inverter will interrupt the rescue operation. If the signal is reactivated, the process will start from the beginning. beginning . 2. In rescue mode, the only voltage-free input of the main board connector (XC2/XC10) that 3VFMACDSP 6P will consider is the RUN signal (#13), whose activation will determine the moment from which the rescue service will be carried out. The speed will be the rescue speed and the direction will depend on the rescue configuration (WITH or WITHOUT detecting favourable direction).

V0.01 – 04/2013

164

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.4. A3 Amendment A3 Amendment is a modification dated 2009 to the standard EN81-1, dated 1998, and reflected within the section 9.11. The A3 Amendment’s aim Amendment’s aim is the protection against unintended movement of the car when doors are open, as reflected in the first section: 9.11.1 Lifts shall be provided with a means to stop unintended car movement away from the landing with

the landing door not in the locked position and the car door not in the closed position, as a result of failure in any single component of the lift machine or drive control system upon which the safe movement of the car depends, except failure of the suspension ropes or chains and the traction sheave or drum or sprockets of the machine.  In addition, the standard states how and with which elements this movement detection has to be carried out, on which elements we shall act or not, which would be the actions in front of this type of failure, the maximum limits  limits allowed, etc. For the integral text of the standard, refer to appendix C. The A3 Amendment implementation is different depending on the machine type of the installation: with gear (geared, asynchronous) or without gear (gearless, synchronous). The reason of this difference is reflected in sections 9.11.3 and 9.11.4 of the standard:

The means shall be capable of performing as required without assistance from any lift component that, during normal operation, controls the speed or retardation, stops the car or keeps it stopped, unless

9.11.3

there is built-in redundancy and a nd correct operation is self-monitored. NOTE Machine brake according 12.4.2 is considered to have built-in built-i n redundancy. In the case of using the machine brake, self-monitoring could include verification of correct lifting or dropping of the mechanism or verification of braking force. If a failure is detected, next normal start of the lift shall be  prevented.  preven ted. Self-monitoring is subject to type examination.  examination.   9.11.4

The stopping element of the means shall act:

a) on the car, or b) on the counterweight, or c) on the rope system (suspension or compensating), or d) on the traction sheave (e.g. on the sheave directly or on the same shaft in the immediate vicinity of the sheave). The stopping element of the means or the means keeping the car stopped may be common with those used for: - preventing overspeed in down direction, - preventing ascending car overspeed (9.10). The stopping elements of the means may be different for the down direction and for the up direction.  

In the case of SYNCHRONOUS (without gear) machines, the brakes act on the traction pulley itself. In addition, there are 2 brakes, so that the system is redundant and we can know their state through the reading of brake microswitches. Therefore, we can use them to avoid unintended movement of the car. The case of ASYNCHRONOUS (with gear) is different. The brake acts on the machine rotor (motor shaft), but not on the traction pulley itself, so that this element cannot be used as stopping element. However, the standard does allow that “… “…The The stopping element of the means or the means keeping the car stopped may be common with those used for preventing overspeed in down or up direction”. This is the reason why, an interlocking device has been enabled on the overspeed governor. This device will be controlled by 3VFMAC-DSP 6P.

 A3 A  Amendment  mendment , is the control of the stopping element. Whatever the case, the inverter’s role , in regard with A3

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

165

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.4.1. A3 Amendment for asynchronous motors (ASYNC) section, in installations including asynchronous motors, the A3 Amendment As already mentioned in previous section, function has been implemented by using an interlocking device of the overspeed governor . This device consists of an electromechanical coil activated by the inverter via the KRL1 output. In addition, this device is provided with microcontact used by the inverter for its state monitoring via the 19 input of connector XC2. - When the inverter is in idle state , the coil keeps the overspeed governor interlocked. This way, if a car unintended movement occurs, the overspeed governor will act to leave the lift interlocked. - When the inverter is moving the machine , the coil releases the overspeed governor. This way, the overspeed governor operates normally and acts in the event of overspeed. The states of the KRL1 relay output and the XC2/19 input can be monitored through LEDs SP and 19, respectively. The following table shows the two valid states, depending on whether the lift is stopped or running. LIFT STATE

Relay KRL1

LED SP

Input XC2/19

LED 19

STOPPED

Deactivated

OFF

Activated

ON

RUNNING

Activated

ON

Deactivated

OFF

TABLE 13.9 Any discrepancy between the state of the KRL1 output and the state of the XC2/19 input will incur in a specific error associated to the A3 Amendment. These errors will be shown later in section 15.5.1.2. The A3 Amendment function for ASYNCHRONOUS motors is available from version 911A on. 13.4.1.1. Parameters The parameters associated to the A3 Amendment function are gathered in the group of parameters A3A. Their description, range and default values are reflected in the following table: ID

NAME

Amendment  A3A.00 A3 Amendment  Activation A3A.01 Time of interlocking A3A.02 Time of release

DESCRIPTION

RANGE

This parameter specifies whether the function associated to A3 amendment is activated. Delay between uncontrolled contactor opening and interlocking activation. Maximum waiting time for the activation of release output.

0: Deactivated 1: Activated, automatic reset 2: Activated, manual reset

DEFAULT VALUES 1

1.00..10.00 s

4.00 s

0.10..2.50 s

1.20 s

TABLE 13.10  A3A.00: A3  A3 Amendment Activation  Activation  * A3A.00: Parameter A3A.00 determines the activation (A3A.00 = 1 or 2) or deactivation (A3A.00 = 0) of this function in the inverter. This parameter has been included to enable the use of inverters with software version 911A or higher in installations WITHOUT A3 Amendment. If the A3 Amendment is deactivated, the KRL1 function will speed limit relay and the function of the XC2/19 input will be RESET OF ERROR. If the A3 Amendment is activated, both functions, speed limit and RESET OF ERROR for KRL1 and XC2/19, respectively, will be cancelled and they will take the required functions for the A3 Amendment function, such as interlocking device control and reading of its state. There are two modes for this function activation: -  A3A.00 = 1: A3 Amendment activated with “automatic reset”: Any other error associated to the A3 Amendment will be automatically reset by the inverter, with no need of the maintenance staff intervention.

V0.01 – 04/2013

166

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter -  A3A.00 = 2: A3 Amendment activated with “manual reset”: Any other error associated to the A3 Amendment will leave the inverter out of service. To reset this error, the maintenance staff intervention is required and one of the following actions has to be carried out: a) Enter SETUP and then exit. b) Press the red button P/R of the console. c) Switch off and on again the device. reset) as there are arguments against any one of The default value is 1 (function activated with automatic reset) the other two options: - IT IS NOT 2   because, according to certification bodies, the option of automatic reset (value 1) complies with the standard. Thus, the inverter will never be out of service because of occasional errors associated to A3 Amendment appeared. But, if the certification bodies would change the criteria relating to this point in such a way that the manual reset becomes compulsory, with just changing the value of one parameter it would be enough. - IT IS NOT 0 to avoid a possible interlocking of the lift . If the function associated to A3 Amendment is implemented in the installation, but it is not enabled in the inverter (A3A.00=0), the moment the lift starts moving, the interlocking will occur. If the function associated to A3 Amendment is NOT implemented in the installation, but it is enabled in the inverter (A3A.00=1), in idle state, error 30 (associated to A3 Amendment) will appear. All we

in the inverter (A3A.00 1), in idle state, error 30 (associated to A3 Amendment) will appear. All we have to do is to deactivate the function (A3A.00=0).

VERY IMPORTANT

IF THE FUNCTION ASSOCIATED TO  A3 AMENDMENT IS  IMPLEMENTED IN THE INSTALLATION, BUT IT IS DISABLED IN THE INVERTER ( A3A.00  A3A.00 = 0), THE LIFT INTERLOCKING WILL OCCUR. * A3A.01: Time of interlocking Parameter A3A.01 or time of interlocking is the time elapsing between the contactors’ opening (out of the stopping cycle) and the re-interlocking of the overspeed governor.  “Contactors’ openin  “Contactors’ opening g of contactors out of the stopping cycle” means any contactor contactors’ s’ opening due to the appearance of an error in the inverter or due to the detection of an opening in the safety chain. By instance, the lift stopping in MES mode or INSPECTION mode is carried out when the control board opens the safety chain, which incurs in error 0E in the inverter. A further example would be when, in normal operation mode, a low voltage error (err 04) occurs during a travel. In both cases, when detecting the error, the inverter deactivates its outputs of contactors (KRL2) and brake (KRL3) and it stops supplying energy. With ASYNCHRONOUS (GEARED) machines, the moment the lift starts braking (brake coils deactivated), there is a small slipping of the rotor on the brake shoes. This slipping magnitude depends on a large number of factors, like the shoe state, the brake power supply and its adjustment, el the counterweight balance, etc. Therefore, the slipping time can vary from an installation to another one. If the overspeed governor is interlocked while moving, the lift's interlocking would occur. This is the reason why there is a time delay between the contactors’ opening and the re-interlocking of the overspeed governor. If the stopping is carried out according to the normal stopping cycle and without errors, meaning that the brake closes with rotor stopped, this time delay does not happen.

* A3A.02: Time of release. This is the waiting time between KRL1 activation (overspeed governor released) and the reading via XC2/19 input that the overspeed governor is released.  released.  

V0.01 – 04/2013

167

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 13.4.1.2. Errors

In the asynchronous version 911A, there are two errors associated to A3 Amendment and both are the result of any discrepancy between KRL1 output state and XC2/19 input state (refer to table 13.4).

Error 30: Error of overspeed governor interlocking. The interlocking interlocking device  device of the overspeed governor should be interlocking the governor, but the inverter understands it is not. Check that KRL1 output is deactivated and XC2/19 input is activated. Check that the governor is provided with the interlocking coil. If yes, check its power supply.

Error 31: Error of overspeed governor released. The overspeed governor coil should be releasing the governor, but the inverter understands it is interlocked. Check that KRL1 output is activated and XC2/19 input is deactivated. If there is not any problem with the output or with the input, the lift has probably been interlocked. The behaviour of these errors is determined by parameter A3A.00 value, as already mentioned in previous section:

 A3A.00 = 1: Automatic reset. Both errors (30 and 31) are “infinite” or “uncountable”. The appearance

of any of them will NEVER leave the inverter in permanent out of service.  

 A3A.00 = 2: Manual reset. The appearance of any of them (30 or 31) will leave the inverter in permanent out of service and will require a human intervention for reactivation. 13.4.2. A3 Amendment for synchronous motors (SYNC) In installations provided with synchronous (without gear) machines, A3 Amendment implementation uses, like stopping element, the two machine brakes that are acting directly on the traction pulley. The main board takes part as a further element of the A3 Amendment implementation. Therefore, the board must know, at all time, the inverter state. For this purpose, the  the  KRL1 inverter output to one of the main board inputs has been enabled, in such a way that if: • KRL1

Activated : The inverter is available to carry out a service.

• KRL1

Deactivated : The inverter is NOT available to carry out a service. It may suffer an error, it may be in programming mode or it may be switched off.

Thus, the main board remains informed at all time about the inverter state. A3 Amendment function for SYNCHRONOUS motors is available from version 613 on. 13.4.2.1. Parameters The parameters associated to the A3 Amendment function are gathered in the group of parameters A3A. Their description, range and default values are reflected in the following table: ID

NAME

DESCRIPTION

RANGE

0: Deactivated This parameter specifies whether 1: Activated, the function associated to A3 automatic reset 2: Activated, amendment is activated. manual reset

Amendment   A3A.00 A3 Amendment Activation

This parameter specifies the time during which the brake microswitch signal will be analysed.

A3A.01 Time of sampling

1.50..6.00 s

DEFAULT VALUES

1

2.00 s

This parameter will only be effective if A3A.00 has a value different from zero (1 or 2).

TABLE 13.11

168

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

 A3A.00: A3  A3 Amendment Activation  Activation  * A3A.00: Parameter A3A.00 determines activation (A3A.00=1 or 2) or not (A3A.00=0) of this function in the inverter. This parameter has been included to enable the use of inverters with software version 613 or higher in installations WITHOUT A3 Amendment. If A3 Amendment is deactivated (A3A.00=0), the KRL1 function will be the limit speed one and the function of the XC2/19 input will be defined by the value of STC.08. If this parameter value is different from zero (A3A.00 = 1 or 2), i.e., if A3 Amendment function is activated, with or without automatic reset, then: 1) The KRL1 function as a limit speed relay is cancelled, leaving without effect some of the TR0.01 (speed limit) parameters and TR0.02 (speed limit logic) parameters. 2) Independently of the value set in parameter STC.08, the XC2/19 input is set out as reading of normally closed brake microswitches.  microswitches. 

VERY IMPORTANT

FOR THE A3 AMENDMENT IMPLEMENTATION, IT IS COMPULSORY THAT THE NORMALLY CLOSED TERMINALS OF THE BRAKE MICROSWOTCHES ARE WIRED IN SERIES.

There are two modes for this function activation: - A3A.00 = 1: A3 Amendment activated with “automatic reset”: Any error associated to A3 Amendment will be automatically reset by the inverter, with no need of an intervention from the maintenance staff. -  A3A.00 = 2: A3 Amendment activated with “manual reset”: Any error associated to A3 Amendment will leave the inverter out of service. To Reset this error and intervention from the maintenance staff is required and one of the following actions must be carried out: a) Enter SETUP and, then exit. b) Press the red button P/R of the console. c) Switch off and on again the device. The default value is 1 (function activated with automatic reset) as there as there are arguments against any one of the other two options: - IT IS NOT 2   because, according to certification bodies, the option of automatic reset (value 1) complies with the standard. Thus, the inverter will never be out of service because of occasional errors associated to A3 Amendment appeared. But, if the certification bodies would change the criteria relating to this point in such a way that the manual reset becomes compulsory, with just changing the value of one parameter it would be enough. - IT IS NOT 0 to avoid a possible interlocking of the lift . If the A3 Amendment function is enabled in the main board, but disabled in the inverter (A3A.00 = 0), the KRL1 relay will not close, and the main board will understand that the inverter is not available. If the A3 Amendment function is enabled in the inverter and not in the main board, the KRL1 relay will be closed or open, depending on the inverter state, but as this input is not connected to the main board, its state would be irrelevant.

* A3A.01: Sampling time  time  Parameter A3A.01 is the time during which the brake microswitch signal will be analysed. Its functioning is similar to a filter's one, because it specifies the sampling time required to validate the reading of brake microswitches.. microswitches In addition, during this time, an analyse of the signal is carried out that enables noise detection at this input.   input.

V0.01 – 04/2013

169

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter 13.4.2.2. Errors

There are two errors associated to A3 Amendment in the synchronous version 613:

Error 30: The machine brake should be closed, but the inverter reads as if it was open. Error 32: Noise in reading of brake state.  state.  During A3A.01 seconds, the inverter analyses and determines both the state and the signal quality of the brake microswitches. The behaviour of these errors is determined by parameter A3A.00 value, as already mentioned in previous section:

 A3A.00 = 1: Automatic reset. Both errors (30 and 32) are “infinite” or “uncountable”. The appearance of any of them will NEVER leave the inverter in permanent out of service.  A3A.00 = 2: Manual reset. The appearance of any of them (30 or 32) will leave the inverter in permanent out of service and will require a human intervention for reactivation.

170

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

14. SOFTWARE UPDATING In some cases, the software of the 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter will have to be updated.

If required or recommended, this operation must ONLY be carried by MP technical technica l staff. This process must be done with the software and hardware tools supplied by MP. Otherwise, MP will not be responsible for any resulting consequences. For this purpose, software called “Custom DSP Serial Flasher” is provided . This application includes a wizard updating of the inverter firmware. 14.1. Requirements and needed elements The requirements and needed materials to carry out this process are: Computer: Minimum requirements:  requirements:  • 

Operating System: Microsoft Windows® XP, Windows 7® or Windows Vista®.

•

RAM Memory: 512Mb for Windows 128Mb Windows XP MHz for Windows XP Processor: Pentium®/Atom® 1GHz7/Vista. for Windows 7/Vista o 300 •  Hard Disk: 6.36 Mb.

•  

Recording Software: This software is supplied by MP. It must be previously installed. For further details, refer to the manual associated to this application.

Inverter: A 6P inverter is required, with version 910 or higher for asynchronous motors and version 610A or 611A or higher for synchronous motors. Additional elements: MP supplies a complete kit, with code 2102RS232TTL, that includes: USB serial port. Cable crossover female-female DB9. •  RS232-UNIVERSAL Interface. •  • 

14.2. Process execution •

  STEP 1: 1: Double click the icon “Custom DSP Serial Flasher”

FIGURE 14.1

• 

STEP 2: 2: If the USB-RS232 interface is not connected to the computer, the following message will appear: 

FIGURE 14.2 After the USB-RS232 interface is connected to any USB port, the application will automatically detect it and move on to the next step.

171

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter • 

STEP 3: 3: The following warning will appear:  appear: 

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

FIGURE 14.3 Ensure the inverter is off. If not, switch it off. Click the “OK” button and move to the next step. • 

STEP 4: 4: A window appears where there is a sequence of pictures showing which of the inverter connectors is the PROGRAM connector, where it is located on the PCB and how to connect the cable.   cable.

FIGURE 14.4

V0.01 – 04/2013

172

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

FIGURE 14.5

FIGURE 14.6 After the cable has been connected to the inverter in the right way and place, click the “OK” button and move on to the next step.

173

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

• 

STEP 5: 5: The following warning will appear:  appear: 

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

FIGURE 14.7 Switch on the inverter, and then click the “OK” button.

• 

STEP 6: 6: Wait the full completion of the recording process which consists of five phases: Connecting, password, erasing, programming and verify.  

FIGURE 14.8: Connection

V0.01 – 04/2013

174

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

FIGURE 14.9: Erasing Erasing  

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

FIGURE 14.10: Programming

FIGURE 14.11: Verifying

V0.01 – 04/2013

175

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter If any error occurs during the process, a window like this one will appear:

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

FIGURE 14.12: Failure during the programming This indicates in which process phase the error occurred. In most of the cases, the problems of software updating have to do with connection problems. Then, a dialog box appears to inform about the actions to be carried out:

FIGURE 14.13 If the process has been completed successfully and without errors , move on to the next step.

176

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter • 

STEP 7: 7: The following warning will appear:  appear: 

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

FIGURE 14.14  Disconnect the cable connected to the inverter, click the “OK” button and move on to the next step. • 

STEP 8: 8: The following warning will appear:  appear: 

FIGURE 14.15   Check that the inverter is rebooting, click the “OK” button and move on to the next step.

177

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter • 

STEP 9: 9: The following warning will appear:  appear: 

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

FIGURE 14.16  Click the “YES” button and exit the application. At this moment, the USB-RS232 interface can be disconnected from the computer. If you click the “NO” button, the following window will appear:

FIGURE 14.17  

178

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter There are three possible options: - Click the “Record” button and start a new recording, moving on to the STEP 3. - Click the “Exit” button and exit the application. - Click the “Previous” button and move on to the next window:

FIGURE 14.18 

VERY IMPORTANT DO NOT MODIFY THE “FILE” FIELD UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED FROM MP.

179

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

15. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 15.1. General features Mains connection Motor connection

Uin input voltage Input frequency Mains connection Motor type Output voltage Output rated current In

Maximum current of output (6 seconds) Output frequencies Distance between inverter and motor

220 Vac; 400 Vac; -15% +10% three-phase 50 – 60 Hz Three-phase Induction Asynchronous motors, model 3VFMAC-DSP 6P A Permanent magnet synchronous motors, model 3VFMAC-DSP 6P S 0 - Uin 3VFMAC-DSP / 10 HP, 400 V: 17 Amps 3VFMAC-DSP / 10 HP, 220 V: 35 Amps 3VFMAC-DSP / 15 HP, 400 V: 26 Amps 3VFMAC-DSP / 20 HP, 400 V: 32 Amps 2 In (Switching frequencies from 5,5 to 10 KHz) 1,5 In (Switching frequencies from 11 to 20 KHz) 0 – 65 Hz

With Incremental Encoder TTL/RS 422: 7 metres With Incremental Encoder TTL/RS 422 + Filter type EMIKON3036: 25 metres

With absolute Encoder sin/cos type Endat 1.0: 15 metres

With absolute Encoder sin/cos type Endat 1.0 + additional hardware: 25 metres (Both ends of the shield have to be connected to ground) Control characteristics

Control features Open-loop control voltage/frequency Closed-loop control with industrial encoder Removal of the roll-back effect in starting by means of weight reading.

Control in closed-loop with industrial encoder Position control starting/stopping (synchronous motors) 5,5 - 20 KHz Asynchronous motors, by default 10 KHz

Switching frequency

Environment conditions

EMC Safety

Control connections

5,5 - 15 KHz Synchronous motors, by default 10 KHz 0,5 - 10 seconds 0,5 - 10 seconds S-Curves with modification factor to model the profile and minimise the jerk

Acceleration time Deceleration time Curves of Starting and Stopping Progressive starting Environment temperature of operation Storage temperature Altitude Relative humidity Protection class EMC Directive 2004/108/CE

Aimed to minimise the backpack frame jerks at starting -10ºC (without frost) up to +55ºC

Low voltage Directive 2006/95/CE Machine Directive 2006/42/CE Lifts Directive 95/16/CE Filter of contactor reading CAN-BUS Commands

-20ºC up to +85ºC 100% of the load capacity up to 1000 metres 0 - 95%, no condensation, no corrosion, no dripping water IP20 in front operation EN12016 Immunity EN12015 Emission UNE-EN61010-1 Safety in electrical equipment UNE-EN 60204-1 Safety in machines. electrical eq equipment uipment in machines UNE 81-1 Safety in lifts Reading of the contactor coil. Terminals (11, 12), 110V, +/- 10% Connector XC13 CAN-BUS 2.0B Communication Interface Connector XC9 Connector XC2: 11, Common 11-13, Starting 11-14, Rated speed (open: Approach) 11-15, Second speed 11-16, Normal (open: Inspection) 11-17, Second acceleration 11-18, Direction (open: Down / closed: Up)

11-19, Error reset 11-19, State reading of overspeed governor interlocking device (Amendment A3/EN81)

11-19, Error reset 11-19, Reading of brake microswitches (synchronous)

180

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter Rescue mode input signal Connector XC3 Encoder

Connector XC3 (20, 23)

Scope of application asynchronous motors Incremental of square wave type ABZ. Power supply 5 Vdc Interface TTL/RS 422, line driver Minimum number of pulses 1024, maximum 5000, recommended 2000 Connector XC6 (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) 

Scope of application synchronous motors Absolute type sin/cos. Power supply 5 Vdc Interface Type Endat 1.0 Number of pulses per turn 2048. Absolute 13 bits Connector XC6 (1, 6, 7), XC8 (42, 41) Connector XC5 (T1, T2), XC7 (T3, T4) Output relays Voltage-free output Brake resistor

Protections

Hardware

Contactors XC4 (34, 35) Brake XC4 (36, 37) Speed limit (programmable logic). Connector XC4 (32, 33) Connector faston B1, B2 Maximum distance 90 cm, shielded cable The power ratings and their ohm values are described in the table of resistors Protection fuse of power input (F1) Protection fuse of power source of 10 Vdc (F2, 2 A)

Protection fuse of control area (F3, F4, 1 A) Detection of overcurrent Detection of high mains voltage (Model 400 V: Maximum 800 Vdc, Model 220 V: Maximum 394 Vdc) Detection of low mains voltage (Model 400 V: Minimum 500 Vdc, Model 220 V: Minimum 176 Vdc) Detection of encoder problems: connection, noise, turn direction Detection of motor blocked (maximum current more than 6 s) Detection of no connection in force terminals C1-C2 Detection of short-circuit Detection of overtemperature of power module Detection of motor not connected Detection of overspeed (> 20% rated speed) Detection of unbalance or absence of phases

Software

Management of errors PC and PDA tools

Others

Adjustment and calibration

Detection of failure in dc-link capacitor Detection of non-controlled opening of contactors Detection of errors in parameterisation Detection of brake opening / non-controlled closing Up to 32 errors stored MPConfig: Configuration and parameterisation DSP Monitoring: Monitoring of Speed, Current and Voltage DSP serial flasher: firmware recording DSP Generator of sinusoidal S-curves Test function of encoder wiring Test function and adjustment of current sensors in the installation

Test function of counterweight balance with no load 8.

Autotuning function for machine and encoder with no load hanging from the traction pulley. Operation with emergency voltage for Rescue operation: -  48 Vdc coming from batteries

Rescue

 

220 Vac one-phase coming from UPS TABLE 15.1

NOTE: The switching frequency in open-loop mode is internally fixed to 10.0 KHz, independently of the value set at “Switching Frequency” parameter. Any other switching frequency requires the closed-loop mode operation.

8

 In testing phase.  MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

181

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

15.2. Models, resistors, capacitors and filters 15.2.1. Asynchronous inverters INSTALLATION TYPE

WITH MACHINE ROOM

MACHINE ROOM LESS

MODEL

INPUT FILTER

RESISTOR WITHOUT SHIELD

HP

Vac

10

400

P0603007

40 Ω / 1040 W

15

400

P0603008

30 Ω / 1400 W

20

400

142-003

30 Ω / 4000 W

10

230

142-003

14 Ω / 1040 W

10

400

15

400

20

400

10

230

X-B1440-003 PREMO 142-015 EMIKON X-B1440-004 PREMO X-B1440-005 PREMO X-B1440-005 PREMO

40 Ω / 1040 W 30 Ω / 1400 W 30 Ω / 4000 W 14 Ω / 1040 W

CAPACITORS

2 x (2200 µF / 400 in SERIES 2 x (3300 µF / 400 in SERIES 2 x (4700 µF / 400 in SERIES 2 x (2200 µF / 400 in PARALLEL

OUTPUT FILTER

V) V) V) V)

2

Section 4 and 6 mm , 8 turns in ferrite Section 4 and 6 mm 2, 8 turns in ferrite 2 Section 10 mm , 7 turns in ferrite 2 Section 10 mm , 7 turns in ferrite

LC1D18FL LC1D25FL LC1D38FL LC1D38FL

2

2 x (2200µF / 400V) in SERIES

Section 4 and 6 mm , 8 turns in ferrite

2 x (3300 µF / 400 V) in SERIES 2 x (4700 µF / 400 V) in SERIES 2 x (2200 µF / 400 V) in PARALLEL

Section 4 and 6 mm , 8 turns in ferrite 2 Section 10 mm , 7 turns in ferrite 2 Section 10 mm , 7 turns in ferrite

TABLE 15.2 

Telemecanique CONTACTORS

LC1D18FL

2

LC1D25FL LC1D38FL LC1D38FL

15.2.2. Synchronous inverters SYNCHRONOUS INSTALLATION TYPE

MODEL HP

INPUT FILTER

RESISTOR WITHOUT SHIELD

CAPACITORS

OUTPUT FILTER

2 x (2200 µF / 400 V) in SERIES

Section 4 and 6 mm , 8 turns in ferrite

2 x (3300 µF / 400 V) in SERIES 2 x (4700 µF / 400 V) en SERIE

Section 4 and 6 mm , 8 turns in ferrite Section 10 mm2, 7 turns in ferrite

2 x (2200 µF / 400 V) in SERIES

Section 4 and 6 mm , 8 turns in ferrite

2 x (3300 µF / 400 V) in SERIES 2 x (4700 µF / 400 V) in SERIES

Section 4 and 6 mm , 8 turns in ferrite 2 Section 10 mm , and 7 turns in ferrite

Vac

10

400

P0603007

Q=450, 630 Kg 40 Ω / 2200 W --------Q=1000 Kg 40 Ω / 4400 W

15

400

P0603008

30 Ω / 4400 W

20

400

142-003

30 Ω / 8000 W

10

400

X-B1440-003 PREMO 142-015 EMIKON

Q=450, 630 Kg 40 Ω / 2200 W --------Q=1000 Kg 40 Ω / 4400 W

15

400

20

400

WITH MACHINE ROOM

Telemecanique CONTACTORS

2

LC1D18FL

2

MACHINE ROOM LESS

X-B1440-004 PREMO X-B1440-005 PREMO

30 Ω / 4400 W 30 Ω / 8000 W

LC1D25FL LC1D38FL

2

LC1D18FL

2

LC1D25FL LC1D38FL

TABLE 15.3

VERY IMPORTANT In installations including more than 16 levels, the power of resistors must be doubled, the cables must be shielded and their length must not exceed 5 meters.

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

182

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

15.3. Model and power of the inverter according to gearless configurations

INSTALLATION TYPE

Range of “Q” (Kg)

Maximum P+Q (Kg)

Speed (m/s)

MP GO 450

from 400 to 480 Kg

1450

1.00

MP GO 600

from 481 to 630 Kg

1600

1.00

MP GO 750

from 631 to 800 Kg

2000

1.00

2400

1.00

MP GO 1000

from 900 to 1000 Kg 2800

1.00

2800

1.00

2955

1.00

730

1.00

MP GO 1088 MP GO 1250

from 1001 to 1150 Kg from 1151 to 1275 Kg up to 180 Kg

MACHINE MODEL 

Mago 100.2.240 Mago 125.2.240 Mago 150.2.240 Mago 175.2.240 Mago 175.2.240 Mago 200.2.240 Mago 250.2.240 Mago 100.1.240

INVERTER MODEL

RUN (meters)

COMPENSATING CHAIN

Vac

HP

400

10

50

> 27 Meters

400

10

50

> 27 Meters

400

10

50

> 27 Meters

400

10

50

> 27 Meters

400

15

50

> 27 Meters

400

15

50

> 27 Meters

400

15

50

> 27 Meters

400

10

50

> 27 Meters

MP GO FLEX

from 181 to 225 Kg

825

1.00

from 226 to 300 Kg

950

1.00

from 301 to 375 Kg

1125

1.00

from 376 to 450 Kg

1350

from 451 to 525 Kg

1425

1.00

from 526 to 630 Kg

1530

1.00

775

1.00

up to 225 Kg

from 226 to 300 Kg

WMR GEARLESS

1.00

900

from 301 to 375 Kg

1025

from 376 to 450 Kg

1175

1.00

1.00

1.00

from 451 to 525 Kg

1400

1.00

from 526 to 630 Kg

1500

1.00

Mago 125.1.240 Mago 150.1.240 Mago 175.1.240 Mago 200.1.240 Mago 200.1.240 Mago 225.1.240 Mago 250.1.240 Mago 275.1.240 Mago 125.1.320 Mago 150.1.320 Mago 150.1.320 Mago 175.1.320 Mago 200.1.320 Mago 225.1.320 Mago 225.1.320 Mago 250.1.320 Mago 250.1.320 Mago 275.1.320

400

10

50

> 27 Meters

400

10

50

> 27 Meters

15

No

400

10

50

> 27 Meters

15

No

50

> 27 Meters

400

10

400

10

50

> 27 Meters

400

10

50

> 27 Meters

18

No

400V

10

50

> 27 Meters

18

No

50

> 27 Meters

18

No

50

> 27 Meters

18

No

50

> 27 Meters

400

400

400

10

10

10

400

10

50

> 27 Meters

400

10

50

> 27 Meters

TABLE 15.4 The previous table applies to installations of average traffic (ED9  = 40%) and when the environment temperature (Ta) is lower than 45ºC, with a switching frequency (fc) of 10 KHz. In any other type of conditions, consult MP. For any type of installation not reflected in the previous table, we must size the inverter in such a way that the current and the power are higher than the ones of the selected machine. This increase will depend on the ED, the performance, the switching frequency and the environment temperature of the installation. Should you have any doubt, contact MP for support.

9

 Empty Duty = Rango de utilización  MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

183

V0.01 – 04/2013  

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

APPENDIX A: PINOUT DEVICE NI USB-8473 A XC9 OF THE INVERTER The device CAN NI USB 8473 is provided with a DB9 male connector with the following pinout:

those three poles are to be connected into XC9 Wago connector of the inverter according to following table: PIN CAN_H

XC9 50

DB9 7

V0.01 – 04/2013

CAN_L

49

2

V-

48

3

184

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

APPENDIX B: PINOUT OF THE ABSOLUTE/SINUSOIDAL ENCODER ADAPTER CABLE To connect the encoder to the invertor an adapter cable is required. The encoder adapter cable supplies the connection interface between the machine encoder and the inverter.

PICTURE C.1 The machine encoder cable has a DB15 male connector at one end which must be connected to our DB15

female adapter cable. The female connector of 3 poles “+/-“ will be connected to the power supply source of 5 Vdc. All the remaining connectors will be connected to the inverter in the following way: 41, 42: 42: 7-poles, in XC8 1, 6, 7: 7: 7-poles, in XC6 T1, T2 T2:: 2-poles, in XC5 T3, T4: T4: 2-poles, in XC7 The adapter cable pinout is shown in following table : DB15 FEMALE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 HOUSING

INVERTER XC5/T2 XC5/T1 NC POSITIVE (5V) NEGATIVE (GND) NC XC8/41 NC XC7/T3 XC7/T4 NC XC6/6 XC6/7 XC8/42 NC XC6/1

TABLE C.1

FIGURE C.1 Note:   As shown in the figure, the poles’ numbering of DB15 female connector, seen from the front, starts Note: from right to left. With housing, we mean the metal housing of the connector. Here, NC means “Not Connected”.

185

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

APPENDIX C: EXTRACT OF EN81-1+A3 AMENDMENT

9.11 Protecti Protection on agai agains nstt unintended car movement  movement  9.11.1 Lifts shall be provided with means to stop unintended car movement away from the landing with the landing door not in the locked position and the car door not in the closed position, as a result of a failure in any single component of the lift machine or dive control system upon which the safe movement of the car depends, except failure of the suspension ropes or chains and the traction shave or drum or sprockets of the machine.  machine.  NOTE

A failure of the traction sheave includes a loss of traction. traction.  

9.11.2 The means shall detect unintended movement of the car, shall cause the car to stop, and keep it stopped.   stopped. 9.11.3 The means shall be capable performing as required without assistance from any lift component that, during normal operation, controls theofspeed or retardation, stops the car or keeps it stopped, unless there is built-in redundancy and correct operation is self-monitored.  self-monitored.   NOTE

Machine brake according 12.4.2 is considered to have built-in redundancy.  redundancy. 

In the case of using the machine brake, self-monitoring could include verification of correct lifting or dropping of

In the case of using the machine brake, self monitoring could include verification of correct lifting or dropping of the mechanism or verification of braking force. If a failure is detected, next normal start of the lift shall be prevented. Self-monitoring is subject to type examination. 9.11.4 The stopping element of the means shall act: a) on the car, or  or  b) on the counterwei counterweight, ght, or  or  c) on the rope system (suspension or compensating), or or   d) on the traction sheave (e.g. on the sheave directly or on the same shaft in the immediate vicinity of the sheave).  sheave).  The stopping element of the means, or the means keeping the car stopped may be common with those used for: −

preventing overspeed in down direction direction,, 

−

preventing ascendi ascending ng car overspeed (9.10). (9.10).  

The stopping elements of the means may be different for the down direction and for the up direction.  

186

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

9.11.5. The means shall stop the car in a distance:  distance:   −

not exceeding 1,20 m from the landing where the unintended unintended car movement movement has been been detected, and  and 

−

the vertical distance between the landing sill and the lowest part of the car apron shall not exceed 200 mm, and

− the free distance from car sill to landing door lintel, or from landing sill to car door lintel shall not be less than 1,00 m (see Figure 4).  4).  These values shall be obtained with any load in the car, up to 100 % of rated load.  load. 

Figure 4 − Unintended car movement 9.11.6 During the stopping phase, the stopping element of the means shall not allow a retardation of the car in excess of:  of:  −

1 gn for unintended movements in up direction,  direction,  

−

the values accepted for safety gears in down direction. direction.  

These values shall be obtained with any load in the car, up to 100 % of rated load, moving away from a standstill position at landing level.  level. 

187

V0.01 – 04/2013

MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN 

 

 

TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT 3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

9.11.7 The unintended movement of the car shall be detected by at least one switching device at latest when the car leaves the unlocking zone (7.7.1).  (7.7.1).  This switching device shall: shall:   −

either be a safety contact in conformity with 14.1.2.2, or  or 

−

be connected in such a way as to satisfy the requirements for safety circuits in 14.1.2.3, or or 

−

satisfy requirements of 14.1.2.6. 14.1.2.6.  

9.11.8 NOTE

The means shall operate an electric safety device in conformity with 14.1.2 if it is engaged.   This can be common to switchin switching g device of 9.11.7. 9.11.7.  

9.11.9

When the means has been activated or the self-monitoring has indicated a failure of the stopping

element of the means, its release or the reset of the lift shall require the intervention of a competent person.  person.   9.11.10

The release of the means shall not require the access to the car or the counterweight.  counterweight. 

9.11.11

After its release, the means shall be in a condition to operate.